Borger TX – Specifications

Borger TX – Specifications

Project Manual

For

The Reserves at Brookside

New Apartment Complex

Borger, Texas

April 24, 2015

Project No. 14-2651

Set No. ______

THE RESERVES AT BROOKSIDE

NEW APARTMENT COMPLEX

BORGER, TEXAS

Project No. 14-2651

DATE OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

OWNER

ARCHITECT

April 24, 2015

BROOKSIDE PARTNERS, LLC

Brett Johnson, Pat Beatty

5345 W. 151 st

913 396 6310

Terrace Leawood, KS 66224

Fax 913 396 6312

JONES GILLAM RENZ ARCHITECTS INC

730 N. 9 th

PO Box 2928 Salina KS 67402

Jeffrey S. Gillam, Project Architect

785 827 0386 Fax 785 827 0392

CIVIL ENGINEER

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER

MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL

J. SHEEHAN ENGINEERING P.C

PO Box 150 2302 10 th Ave

Canyon TX 79015

806 557 4090 [email protected]

MANLEY STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS

James T. Manley, P.E.

107 S. 7 th

Street Salina KS 67401

785 823 0538 Fax 785 827 6952

LST CONSULTING ENGINEERS, P.A.

John F. Lewis-Smith, P E

4809 Vue Du Lac Place, Ste 201

Manhattan KS 66503

785 587 8042 Fax 785 587 8039

Table of Contents

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

LIST OF DRAWINGS

Division 1 - General Requirements

Section 01010 General Work Requirements

Section 01019

Section 01500

Special Provisions

Temporary Facilities

Division 2 - Site Work

Section 02110 Site Clearing

Section 02205

Section 02211

Section 02222

Section 02223

Section 02225

Soil Materials

Rough Grading

Excavating

Backfilling

Trenching

Section 02281

Section 02520

Termite Control

Portland Cement Concrete Paving

Section 02810 Irrigation Systems

Section 02920 Lawns and Grasses

Section 02930 Exterior Plants

Division 3 – Concrete

Section 03100

Section 03200

Section 03300

Concrete Formwork

Concrete Reinforcement

Cast-In-Place Concrete

Division 4 - Masonry

Section 04100

Section 04300

Mortar and Masonry Grout

Unit Masonry System

Section 04700 Manufactured Masonry

Division 5 - Metals

Section 05120 Structural Steel

Division 6 - Wood and Plastics

Section 06100 Rough Carpentry

Section 06112

Section 06114

Section 06176

Framing and Sheathing

Wood Blocking

Metal Plate-Connected Wood Trusses

Section 06200 Finish Carpentry

Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection

Section 07181 Water Repellent Coating

Section 07212 Board Insulation

Section 07213 Batt Insulation

Section 07311 Asphalt Shingles

Section 07460

Section 07620

Section 07900

Siding

Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

Joint Sealers

Division 8 - Doors and Windows

Section 08111

Section 08211

Standard Steel Doors and Frames

Panel Masonite Doors

Section 085313 Vinyl Windows

Section 08710

Section 08800

Door Hardware

Glazing

The Reserves at Brookside

New Apartment Complex –Borger TX

TC-1

Page

A201-1997-1 – 44

SC-1 - SC-3

LOD-1

01010-1 - 01010-4

01019-1 - 01019-2

01500-1 - 01500-2

02110-1

02205-1

02211-1 - 02211-2

02222-1

02223-1 - 02223-2

02225-1 - 02225-2

02281-1 - 02281-2

02520-1 - 02520-2

02810-1 - 02810-6

02920-1 - 02920-6

02930-1 - 02930-10

03100-1 - 03100-2

03200-1 - 03200-2

03300-1 - 03300-3

04100-1 - 04100-2

04300-1 - 04300-4

04700-1 - 04700-2

05120-1 - 05120-2

06100-1 - 06100-9

06112-1 - 06112-2

06114-1

06176-1 - 06176-6

06200-1 - 06200-2

07181-1

07212-1

07213-1 - 07213-2

07311-1 - 07311-5

07460-1 - 07460-3

07620-1 - 07620-2

07900-1 - 07900-2

08111-1 - 08111-2

08211-1 - 08211-2

085313-1 - 085313-3

08710-1 - 08710-5

08800-1 - 08800-2

Table of Contents

JGR 14-2651

Table of Contents, (Cont’d)

Division 9 - Finishes

Section 09260

Section 09306

Section 09650

Gypsum Board Systems

Floor and Wall Tile

Resilient Flooring

Section 09680

Section 09900

Carpet – Pad and Tack

Painting

Division 10 - Specialties

Section 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories

Division 11

Section 11451 Residential Appliances

Division 12

Section 12356 Kitchen Casework

Section 12491 Horizontal Louver Blinds

Page

09260-1 - 09260-2

09306-1 - 09306-2

09650-1 - 09650-2

09680-1 - 09680-4

09900-1 - 09900-4

10800-1

11451-1 - 11451-4

12356-1 - 12356-8

12491-1 - 12491-3

The Reserves at Brookside

New Apartment Complex –Borger TX

TC-2 Table of Contents

JGR 14-2651

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

DEFINITIONS - Supplement Paragraph 1.1 as follows: a. When words such as approved, proper, satisfactory, equal, and as directed are used, they imply such reference to the Architect’s specific approval and directions. b. c.

Provide means to furnish and install. a.

The provisions of the Agreement take precedence over all other Contract Documents.

WARRANTY - Supplement Paragraph 3.5.1 as follows:

Contractor warrants to Owner and Architect that on receipt of notice from either of them, within the period of one (1) year following date of Substantial Completion, that defects in materials

SHOP DRAWINGS - Supplement Paragraph 3.12 as follows: a. and/or workmanship have appeared in the Work, Contractor will promptly correct such defects to the state of condition originally required by the Contract Documents at Contractor’s expense.

The Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of all Shop or Setting Drawings and Schedules required for the work of the various trades, after same have been checked and compared with the

Contract Document Requirements, and after checking with field conditions at the job and so certified on the Drawings by the Contractor. Above Drawings will not be checked by Architect unless same bear certification. b.

Architect’s approval is subject to notations on Drawings, Compliance with Drawings and

Specifications, and conditions and measurements at project. Measurements and quantity not checked or approved.

SAMPLES - Supplement Subparagraph 3.12.3 as follows: a. All samples as called for in the various Sections of this Specification and any other samples, as directed, shall be furnished by the Contractor for approval. b. All samples of materials that require approval as to color, texture, finish and type shall be furnished at the same time, so that an intelligent selection of colors and textures may be made by the Architect.

COLOR SELECTIONS a. b.

The Contractor shall provide for and coordinate into the project construction schedule, a 6-week time frame for the Architect/Designer to make final color selections from Contractor’s submittals, obtain approval from the Owner and to submit a color schedule, indicating what colors go where, to the Contractor. Time frame begins when Architect has received 100% of submittals listed below.

Submittals, i.e., actual samples, manufacturers’ literature, full color line options, etc., shall include as a minimum, but not limited to:

Carpet Types

Vinyl Composition Tile Flooring

Vinyl Base

Ceramic Wall Tile

Ceiling Types

Paint Types

Corner Guards

Plastic Laminate (Manufacturer)

Wood Finish for Casework and Doors

Aluminum Storefront System

S-1 Supplementary Conditions

6.

7.

8.

9.

CLEAN UP - Supplement Paragraph 3.15 as follows: a. Each Contractor shall, at all times, remove any and all of his rubbish from the buildings and grounds and keep the building site clean. b. c.

4)

5)

In addition to the general broom cleaning, the General Contractor shall do the following special cleaning for all trades at the completion of the work:

1) Glass. Remove putty, stains and paint from all glass and wash and polish same. Care shall be taken not to scratch the glass.

2) Painted, Decorated, and Stained Work. Remove all marks, stains, fingerprints and other soil or dirt from all painted, decorated and stained work.

3) Temporary Protection. Remove all temporary protections; clean and polish all floors at completion.

Woodwork. Clean and polish all woodwork upon completion.

Hardware. Clean and polish all hardware for all trades. This shall include removal of all stains, dust, dirt, paint, etc., upon completion.

6) Tile Work. Remove all spots, soil and paint from all tile work, wash same upon completion.

7) Fixtures and Equipment. Clean all fixtures and equipment, removing all stains, paint, dirt and dust.

All combustible rubbish, and all debris and other rubbish shall be removed entirely from the premises.

MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS - Supplement Paragraph 6.2 as follows: a. General Contractor shall assume general coordination and direction of the project. General

Contractor shall cooperate with Mechanical and Electrical Contractors and other subcontractors and/or suppliers on the Work and install their work in sequence to facilitate and not delay the completion of the project. The Architect is not the coordinator or expeditor of the work of the contractors and/or subcontractors referred to hereinbefore.

CHANGES IN THE WORK

Refer to Paragraph 7.2 and insert the following: a. Whenever a Change Order involves net cost decrease, the CREDIT to the Owner shall be such net cost decrease. Whenever a Change Order involves a summary net increase, the Contract shall be increased by the amount of such net cost increase plus 15% of such net cost for overhead and b. profit. The General Contractor will furnish supervision and coordination for 10% of the cost of additional Mechanical and Electrical work ordered by the Owner.

The Contractor shall furnish the Owner an itemized accounting with supporting data used in computing the value of any change that might be ordered. c. Change Orders must state a number of added days or days to be deleted from completion time. If no change in days is required by the change order, write NONE. Failure to comply with above voids any later request for extra time.

APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS AND CERTIFICATION FOR PAYMENT a. Amend Subparagraph 9.3.1 and insert the following: On or before the 25th day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment supported by such data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require. b. Amend Subparagraph 9.4.1 and insert: If the Contractor has made application for payment as above, the Architect will, with reasonable promptness and within seven (7) days after receipt of

S-2 Supplementary Conditions

the application, issue an application for payment to the Owner, with a copy to the Contractor in the amount of 90% of the value of the Contract the Architect determines has been completed to the date of application, thus a 10% retainage, less any amount paid to the Contractor, or state in writing his reason for withholding an application as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. c. Date of payment of the Application for Payment by the Owner is hereby defined as the earliest possible date that the Owner can prepare vouchers after receipt of Application for Payment from the Architect and approval of same by any governing body of the Owner and issuance of vouchers to cover Application for Payment.

10. PROPERTY INSURANCE MARINE ALL RISK SPECIAL BUILDERS RISK AND TRANSIT FORM

Refer to Paragraph 11.3 Property Insurance and insert the following: a. Until the Work is completed and accepted by the Owner, the Owner shall effect and maintain total Property Insurance (Marine All Risk Special Builders Risk and Transit Form) upon the

Work at the site to 100% of the insurable value thereof (plus 8% of this insured value for

Architect’s Fee in connection with any loss covered by this insurance) including items of labor and materials connected therewith in or adjacent to the structure insured, materials in place or to be used as a part of the permanent construction, including surplus materials, shanties, protective fences, bridges or temporary structures, miscellaneous materials and supplies incidental to the

Work, and such scaffoldings, stagings, towers, forms and equipment as are not owned or rented by the Contractor, the cost of which is included in the cost of the work. EXCLUSIONS: This insurance does not cover any tools owned by mechanics; any tools, equipment, scaffoldings, stagings, towers and forms owned or rented by the Contractor; the capital value of which is not included in the cost of the work, nor loss of equipment, materials, tools, etc., by theft. b. This insurance shall include the interest of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractor and Sub-

Subcontractor in the Work.

11.

CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE a.

Workers’ Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance - Refer to Subparagraph 11.1.1. b. Bodily Injury and Property Damage - Refer to Subparagraph 11.1.2. Limits shall be as follows:

(1) Limits of liability coverage shall be $500,000.00 Combined Single Limit for Bodily

Injury and Property Damage. c.

Owner’s Protective Liability Insurance - Refer to Paragraph 11.2 - Owner’s Option.

12. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS - Supplement Subparagraph 11.4.1 as follows: a. Bond shall be equivalent to AIA Form A312, two part Performance Bond and Labor and

Materials Bond with amount shown on each part equal to 100% of the total amount payable by the terms of the Contract. Surety shall be company licensed to do business at the place of building and shall be acceptable to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

S-3 Supplementary Conditions

List of Drawings

GENERAL

ALTA Survey

CFP

ADA ADA

L1

Code Footprint

Diagrams

Landscape Plan

CIVIL

C-1

C-2

C-3

C-4

C-5

C-6

C-7

C-8

Cover Sheet and Index

Site Civil Dimension & Erosion Control Plan

Site Contour Plan

Site Utility Plan

Site Coordination Plan A

Site Coordination Plan B

Civil Typical Paving Details

Civil Typical Utility Details

APARTMENTS

Architectural

A1.1 Site Plan

A1.2 Trash Enclosure Plan, Signage and Mail Kiosk Sections

A2.1 Standard/Adaptable Apartments

2 and 3 Bedroom Floor Plans, Finish & Door

Schedules and Casework Elevations

A2.2 Standard/Adaptable Apartments

Enlarged Bath Plans, Interior Elevations and Details

A2.3 Handicapped Apartments

2 and 3 Bedroom Floor Plans, Finish & Door

Schedules and Casework Elevations

A2.4 Handicapped Apartments

Enlarged Bath Plans, Interior Elevations and Details

A2.5

Apartment Building First, Second and Third Floor Plans

A3.1 Exterior Elevations

A3.2 Exterior Elevations

A4.1

A4.2

A4.4

A4.5

Wall Sections

Wall Sections

A4.3 Wall Sections

A4.7

Details

Details

A4.6 Entry Wall Sections and Details

A5.1

Fire Stopping Details

Apartment Building Roof Plan

A6.1 Stair Sections and Details

CLUBHOUSE

Architectural

AC2.1 Clubhouse Floor Plan, Roof Plan, Interior Finish and

Door Schedules

AC3.1 Exterior Elevations, Interior Elevations and Details

AC4.1 Wall Sections

Structural

SC1.1 Foundation Plan and Detail

SC2.1 Roof Framing Plan and Details

Structural

S1.1 Foundation Plan and General Notes

S1.2 Details

S2.1 Floor and Roof Framing Plans

S2.2 Details and Notes

Mechanical

M0.1 Mechanical

M1.1 Typical 2 and 3 Bedroom HVAC Plans

M1.2 Typical 2 and 3 Bedroom Domestic Water Plans and

Typical Domestic Water Riser Diagram

M1.3 First and Third Floor Waste and Vent Plans

M5.1 Typical 2 and 3 Bedroom Waste and Vent Isometric and

Water Riser Diagram – 24 Unit Building Water Service

M6.1 Schedules and Details

ME1.1 24 Unit Building Floorplan, Typical Upper Floor

Breezeway Plan and Enlarged Fire Sprinkler Closet

Electrical

E0.1 Electrical Specifications

E1.1 2 and 3 Bedroom Power Plans and Panel Schedules

E1.2

Electrical Site Plan, Schedule and Details

E6.1 Electrical Riser Diagram and Schedules

Mechanical

MC1.1 Clubhouse Plan - Mechanical Plan and Schedules

MC1.2 Clubhouse Plan – Domestic Water & Waste and Vent

Plans, Schedules and Details

Electrical

EC1.1 Clubhouse – Power & Lighting Plans, Schedules and

Electrical Riser Diagram

LOD List of Drawings

6.

5.

7.

4.

3.

2.

1.

SECTION 01010

GENERAL WORK REQUIREMENTS

GENERAL

Should conflict occur between these General Work Requirements and the General Conditions, the requirements of this Section take precedence.

INTENT OF DOCUMENTS

The Contract Drawings are complementary and what is called for by anyone shall be as binding as if called by all. The intention of the documents is to include all labor and materials, equipment and transportation necessary for the proper execution of the work.

MANUFACTURERS’ DIRECTIONS

All manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the manufacturers, unless herein specified to the contrary.

COOPERATION - CONTRACTOR WITH OWNER

It shall be clearly understood that the Owner reserves the right to install various equipment in the building prior to completion and acceptance, and it shall be the duty of the Contractor to cooperate with the Owner’s employees rendering such assistance and so arranging his work that the entire project will be delivered complete in the best possible condition when required.

BUILDING PERMIT

As stated in Subparagraph 4.7.1, AIA DOCUMENT A201, General Conditions, the General Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit.

CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION

Before starting construction, a meeting shall be held with Contractor(s), Architect, Consulting Engineers in attendance to plan and coordinate the schedule of construction and to review intent of Contract

Documents. Contractor(s) shall follow instructions received at meeting in prosecuting the Work.

MATERIALS - EQUIPMENT - SUBSTITUTION a. In general, these Specifications identify the required materials and equipment by naming one or more manufacturers, brand, model, catalog number and/or other identification; the first-named manufacturer’s product used as a basis for design; the other named brands considered equivalent.

Equivalent brand manufacturers named must furnish products consistent with the Specifications for the first-named product, as determined by the Architect. Base Bid shall include only those brands named and must be used on the project, except as hereinafter provided. b. Materials or equipment specified exclusively, Base Bid shall be based on same and used on project, except as hereinafter provided. c. Prior to receipt of bids, should Contractor wish to incorporate in Base Bid, brands or products other than those named in the Specifications, he shall submit written request for substitution to

Architect not later than seven (7) days prior to date bids are due. Architect will consider request and items approved will be listed in an addendum issued to all bidders. d. After execution of Contract, substitution of product brands for those named in the Specifications will be considered, only if request is received within thirty (30) days after Contract Date and request includes showing credit due Owner. e. Materials specified equivalent and those proposed for substitution must be equal or better than first-named material in construction, efficiency, utility, aesthetic design, physical size shall not

01010-1 General Work Requirements

be larger than space provided for it. Request for substitution by full description and technical data in two (2) copies, including manufacturer’s name, model, catalog number, photographs or cuts, physical dimensions, operating characteristics, and any other information for comparison. f. Owner reserves the right:

1) To require any or all bidders, before execution of Contract, to state what materials they will use.

2) To require “if bound with the Bid Form,” the Contractor to fill out a BID SUPPLEMENT listing the BASE BID and “ADD” or “DEDUCT” for other materials he proposes to use.

8.

9.

APPROVAL OF SUBCONTRACTORS - MATERIALS a. The Contractor, if requested, must submit for approval before signing Agreement, list of

Subcontractors and material suppliers enumerating items of work to be performed, name of materials, equipment, etc., to be furnished and/or installed. Refer to Paragraph - MATERIALS -

EQUIPMENT - SUBSTITUTION. b.

PROTECTION - Supplement, ARTICLE 10, AIA GENERAL CONDITIONS a. Refer to Paragraph - WEATHER CONDITIONS. b. c.

If the list is not requested prior to signing of Agreement, list, as described in previous paragraph, shall be furnished within ten (10) days of signing Agreement.

Each Contractor shall assume responsibility for his materials stored on the premises.

General Contractor shall take charge and assume general responsibility for proper protection of project during construction. d. The General Contractor shall protect trees, shrubs, lawns and all landscape from damage, providing guards and covering. Damaged work shall be repaired or replaced at his expense.

Protect streets and sidewalks and make repairs at his expense.

1) Water Protection. The General Contractor shall, at all times, protect the excavation, trenches, and/or the building from damage by rain water, spring water, ground water, backing up of drains or sewers and all other water. He shall provide all pumps and equipment and enclosures to provide this protection.

2) Temporary Drainage. The General Contractor shall construct and maintain all necessary temporary drainage and do all pumping necessary to keep the excavation free of water.

3) Snow and Ice. The General Contractor shall remove all snow and ice from public sidewalks and from the building, as may be required for the proper protection and/or prosecution of the

Work.

4) Bracing, Shoring and Sheeting. The General Contractor shall provide all shoring, bracing and sheeting as required for safety and for the proper execution of the work and have same removed when the work is completed.

5) Guard Lights. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain guard lights at all barricades, railings, obstructions in the streets, roads or sidewalks and at all trenches or pits adjacent to public walks or roads.

6) Weather Conditions. The General Contractor shall, at all times, provide protection against weather; rain, winds, storms, frost, or heat, so as to maintain all work, materials, apparatus, and fixtures, free from injury or damage. At the end of the day’s work, all new work likely to be damaged shall be covered.

10. WEATHER CONDITIONS

The Contractor shall protect all portions of his work and all materials, at all times from damage by water, freezing, frost and is to repair, replace and make good to the satisfaction of the Architect, any portion of same which may in the Architect’s opinion, have been damaged by the elements.

01010-2 General Work Requirements

11. GRADES, LINES, LEVELS, AND SURVEYS

The Owner will establish the lot lines, restrictions and a bench mark. All other grades, lines, levels, and bench marks shall be established and maintained by the General Contractor, who shall be responsible for same. The General Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions as shown on the

Drawings and he shall report all errors or inconsistencies in the above to the Architect before commencing work. a. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain well-built batter boards at all corners. He shall establish bench marks in not less than two (2) widely separated places. As the work progresses, he shall establish bench marks at each floor, giving exact levels of the various floors. b. As the work progresses, the General Contractor shall lay out in the forms and the rough flooring the exact location of all partitions as a guide to all trades. c. The General Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions as shown on the

Drawings and he shall report any errors or inconsistencies in the above to the Architect before commencing work.

12. USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS

The Owner reserves the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the building, and further reserves the right to install equipment and facilities which are not a part of the

Contract, notwithstanding the fact that the time of completion of entire work or portions thereof may not have expired; but such taking possession or installation of facilities shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner, in taking possession of completed portions or installing such equipment, and facilities, shall do so at his own expense any damage which may occur either directly or indirectly by reason of such action. a. Building Completion-Occupancy. Owner reserves the right to occupy building when the time for completion of work as stipulated in Contract has been reached, even though all parts of the work have not been completed and accepted by Owner. All work, including heating, electrical, and water service, will be discontinued only to Owner schedule. b. Limit of Contract is not confined to any particular area of the site, but includes any area required to perform work shown on the Drawings and/or specified in these Specifications.

13. REQUIREMENTS IMMEDIATELY AFTER EXECUTION OF CONTRACT

Immediately after execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect the following items which are described more fully in following Articles:

Schedule of Values

Schedule of Operations

Progress Charts

Samples

Superintendent’s name and resume of experience

List of Subcontractors and Material Suppliers a. Schedule of Values on AIA Form G702, or other form approved by the Architect, a detailed breakdown of the Contract Sum indicating the amounts allotted to the various divisions of the work for labor and material. The schedule will serve as a guide to the Architect in determining the amounts due each month as the work progresses. The schedule shall be broken down as directed by the Architect. b. Schedule of Operations based on the above Schedule of Values and indicating the progress of the work up to the first day of each month shall be prepared by the Contractor in a form approved by the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect in duplicate with each application for payment. c. Progress Charts based on the above specified schedule of operations and indicating the progress of the work up to the first day of each month shall be prepared by the Contractor in a form approved by the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect in duplicate with each application for payment. Progress charts shall be in the form of a bar graph. Along with progress charts the Contractor shall provide an estimated monthly cash flow chart.

01010-3 General Work Requirements

14. CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURE a. Each Contractor shall schedule his work so as to cause a minimum of interference with business operations during all of the construction work. b. In-Use Areas. Construction work within areas immediately adjacent to existing in-use areas shall be coordinated with the Owner, so that work is accomplished during periods of light

15. occupancy of the areas and cause the least disturbance. Work shall be executed by methods that will create the last amount of noise. Work shall be prefabricated when practical to do so. New facilities shall be ready for use prior to disturbing existing areas. c.

3) Interruption of utilities must be coordinated with the Owner with changeovers and out of service at night. Weekend and evening changeovers of utilities shall occur with no additional cost to the Owner.

TIME EXTENSIONS ADVERSE WEATHER a. The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the General Conditions in submitting any request for extension of Contract Time due to unusually severe weather. b.

Precautions and Cooperation

1) Notify the Owner 7 days in advance before any utility (natural gas, water, electricity, or sewer) is to be interrupted.

2) With proper notification, interruption in utilities up to 4 hours will be permitted without special provisions by the Contractor. *If any interruption of a utility exceeds 4 hours the

Contractor must make arrangements for temporary alternate utility service.

Definitions:

1. Adverse Weather - Atmospheric conditions at a definite time and place which are unfavorable to construction activities.

2. Unusually Severe Weather - Weather which is more severe than the adverse weather anticipated for the season, location, or activity involved. c. In order for any request of time extension due to unusually severe weather to be valid, the

Contractor must document both of the following conditions.

1. The weather experienced at the project site during the Contract period is more severe that the adverse weather anticipated for the project location during any given month. d.

2. The unusually severe weather actually caused a delay to the completion of the project.

The delay must be beyond the control and without fault or negligence by the Contractor.

The following schedule of monthly anticipated adverse weather delays will constitute the baseline for monthly weather time evaluations. The Contractor's Progress Schedule must reflect these anticipated adverse weather delays in all weather affected activities:

MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER DELAY WORK DAYS BASED ON

FIVE (5) DAY WORK WEEK

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

10 8 7 6 7 7 5 5 5 4 5 9

END OF SECTION 01010

01010-4 General Work Requirements

3.

4.

1.

2.

SECTION 01019

SPECIAL PROVISIONS

GENERAL

Should conflict occur between these Special Provisions and the General Conditions, the requirements of the Special Provisions shall take precedence.

TIME OF CONSTRUCTION - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES a. Time of Construction - The Contractor will commence the work within ten (10) days after the

Architect shall have given the Contractor written notice to commence construction to the satisfaction of the Owner within the calendar days as Contractor so stated in his Bid Form. The time for completion herein set forth shall be extended for the period of any reasonable delay which is due exclusively to causes beyond the control and without the fault of the Contractor, including acts of God, fires, floods, and direction by the Architect. It is impractical to perform any operation of construction and acts of omissions of the Owner with respect to matters for which Owner is solely responsible; provided, however, that no such extension of time for completion shall be granted the Contractor, unless within ten (10) days after the happening of any event relied upon by the Contractor for such extension of time, the Contractor shall have made a request, therefore, in writing to the Architect. Extended time will be submitted with pay request for Owner’s approval. b. Liquidated Damages - The time of completion of the construction of the project is of the essence of this Contract. Should the Contractor neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the project within the time herein agreed upon, after giving effect to extensions of time, if any, herein provided; then in that event and in view of the difficulty of estimating with exactness damages caused by such delay, the Owner shall have the right to deduct from and retain out of such money, which may then be due or which may become due and payable to the Contractor, the sum of THREE

HUNDRED DOLLARS ($300.00) per day for each and every day that such construction is delayed in its completion beyond the specified time, as liquidated damages and not as a penalty.

If the amount due and to become due from the Contractor to the Owner is insufficient to pay in full any such liquidated damages, the Contractor shall pay to the Owner the amount necessary to effect such payment in full; provided, however, that the Owner shall promptly notify the

Contractor in writing of the manner in which the amount retained, deducted or claimed as liquidated damages was computed. c. Joint Responsibility - The General Contractor and/or Subcontractors causing the delay in completion of the project shall be responsible for payment of liquidated damages. In no case shall the total liquidated damages for all contracts exceed the sum of daily liquidated damages multiplied by the number of days of delay in completion.

ALTERNATES - Refer to Alternate Schedule, Section 01030 a. Alternates specified are not a part of Base Bid, but are Alternates to same, their acceptance being at option of Owner. d. e.

ENUMERATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS a. Correlation. Accompanying these Specifications are the Drawings, which jointly with these

Specifications, are intended to explain each other and describe and coordinate the work to be performed under the Contract. b. Verification of Documents. Before submitting his bid, each Bidder shall check his set(s) of

Drawings and Specifications and advise the Architect if any sheets are missing. c. Specifications Explanations. For convenience of reference, the Specifications are separated into

Titled Divisions and Sections. Such separation shall not, however, operate to make the Architect an arbiter to establish limits between the Contractor and Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor.

Drawings. Refer to LIST OF DRAWINGS.

Specifications. Refer to TABLE OF CONTENTS.

01019-1 Special Provisions

5. WARRANTIES

Before being eligible for final payment, Contractor shall deliver to Owner, through Architect, all special warranties specified for materials, equipment and installation.

6. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Before being eligible for final payment, Contractor shall deliver to Owner, through Architect, three (3) copies of manufacturer’s operating instructions, one (1) complete set of shop drawings on each piece of equipment, and such framed instructions as instructed.

7. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

Before being eligible for final payment, the Electrical and Mechanical Contractors shall prepare and deliver to Owner, through Architect, one (1) set of AS-BUILT DRAWINGS. These drawings may consist of marked-up prints, if the Contractor so chooses, but shall show the correct location of every item of equipment, piping, conduit, panel boards, ductwork, switches, valves, etc. If marked-up prints are used, they shall be new white prints.

8. CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE

Upon completion of project, Contractor is to furnish written Certification to the Architect that he has complied with every paragraph of the Specifications and Drawings.

9.

CONTRACTOR’S MONTHLY APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT FORM

Contractor’s monthly Application for Payment shall be submitted as per General Conditions. AIA

Document G702, Application and Certificate for Payment is approved and acceptable.

10. FILING AND RECORDING OF BONDS

In addition to furnishing the number of combination Performance Bond and Labor and Materials Payment

Bond, and Statutory Bond, if required, the Contractor shall file copies of such bonds with Clerk of the

District Court and furnish Architect with receipt furnished by Clerk of the District Court, covering charges for filing and recording of said bonds.

11. STATUTORY BONDS

In addition to furnishing the combination Performance and Labor and Materials Payment Bond specified in General Conditions, the Contractor shall furnish Statutory Bond in an amount not less than 100% of the Agreement in such numbers and form stated in Sample Copy bound in the Specifications. Statutory

Bond shall be filed and recorded with Clerk of the District Court, as specified in Paragraph - FILING

AND RECORDING OF BONDS.

12. DOCUMENTS FURNISHED CONTRACTORS

The General Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, the following working drawings and specifications, including modifications for construction of the project - 20 sets. The General Contractor will be responsible for distribution of these sets to the Subcontractors and suppliers. The Contractor shall pay the actual cost of reproduction and postage for all additional sets requested by him.

13. SALES TAX EXEMPTIONS

a. Materials, labor and equipment incorporated into this project are not exempt from the payment of sales tax under the laws of the State of Kansas and such sales tax shall be

included in the Bid of the Bidder.

END OF SECTION 01019

01019-2 Special Provisions

1.

2.

3.

4.

SECTION 01500

TEMPORARY FACILITIES

GENERAL

Should conflict occur between the Temporary Facilities and the General Conditions, the requirements of this

Section take precedence.

TEMPORARY HEAT a. The General Contractor shall provide heat, fuel and services as necessary to protect all work and materials against injury from dampness and cold until final acceptance of all work and material in the Contract, unless the building or buildings are fully occupied by the Owner prior to such acceptance, in which case, the Owner shall assume all expenses of heating from date of occupancy.

The General Contractor shall provide heat as follows:

1) At all times during the placing, setting and curing of concrete, provide sufficient heat to insure the heating of the spaces involved to not less than 50° F.

2) From the beginning of the application of gypsum board taping and during the setting and curing period, provide sufficient heat to produce a temperature in the spaces involved of not less than 50° F.

3) For a period of ten (10) days previous to the placing of interior wood finish and throughout the placing of this and other interior finishing, varnishing, painting, etc., and until final acceptance of the work or until full occupancy by the Owner, provide sufficient heat to produce a temperature of not less than 70° F. Heating Subcontractor shall set such necessary temporary radiation as may be required.

4) Mechanical Subcontractor shall, as soon as possible, provide temporary heating facilities through the installed heating equipment.

SIGN AND ADVERTISING a.

The General Contractor shall furnish and erect one (1) painted sign, 4’-0” x 8’-0” in size, as shown on the last page of this Section and placed where directed. Sign shall have the following:

1)

2)

3)

Name of Project

Name and Address of Architect

Name and Address of General Contractor

4)

5)

6)

Name of Mechanical Subcontractor

Name of Electrical Subcontractor

Picture of Project (coordinate with Architect) b. Post entire construction with DANGER and NO TRESPASSING signs to comply with safety and insurance regulations. c. Keep premises clear and free from other signs or posters.

TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES a. b.

General Contractor shall provide and maintain in good condition, a painted weatherproof field office

(adequate size trailer acceptable) for use of General Contractor and Architect’s representative.

Provide such building with heat, electric lights, telephone, locked doors, windows, table, and rack for

Drawings. Building to remain property of General Contractor.

Electrical and Mechanical Subcontractors shall maintain similar field office, meeting requirements of previous paragraph, except provisions for Architect’s representative not needed.

01500-1 Temporary Facilities

5. TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES

General Contractor to provide: a. Temporary weathertight enclosures for all exterior openings as soon as possible as walls and roofs are built to protect work from weather. Temporary exterior doors equipped with padlocks. b. In cold weather, provide additional precautions necessary, including heat at such openings to protect building and contents.

TEMPORARY SHEDS 6.

The Contractor shall provide and maintain on the premises watertight storage sheds for storage of all materials which may be damaged by weather. These sheds shall have wood floors raised above the ground.

7.

8.

TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ITEMS

General Contractor shall furnish necessary temporary stairs, chutes, runways, scaffolds, ladders and hoist.

TEMPORARY TOILET ACCOMMODATIONS a. The General Contractor shall provide for the use of all workmen, in accordance with local ordinances, ample temporary sanitary toilet accommodations and keep such clean and free from flies.

Prior to completion of the Contract, all connections and appliances connected with same will be removed and the premises left perfectly clean. b. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall, as soon as conditions of the work will allow, install inside building a temporary toilet with connections to the sewer.

TEMPORARY TELEPHONE 9.

The General Contractor shall install at his own expense, a job telephone, and shall pay for all local calls. All long distance calls shall be paid by party making the call.

10. TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER a. For new construction, the General Contractor shall arrange for temporary service, pay for all expenses therewith and bring services to building and run extensions to locations necessary for operations. b. Permit other Subcontractors to use same. Other Subcontractors requiring additional extensions, make and remove same at their expense. General Contractor shall pay for all electricity consumed.

11. WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION

The Owner will furnish all water for construction. The General Contractor will be responsible for necessary water connections to existing source.

END OF SECTION 01500

01500-2 Temporary Facilities

SECTION 02110

SITE CLEARING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Remove surface debris.

C. Clear site of plant life and grass.

D. Remove trees and shrubs.

E. Remove root system of trees and shrubs.

F. Topsoil excavation.

1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable local codes and ordinances for disposal of debris, burning debris on site, use of herbicides, etc.

B. Coordinate clearing Work with utility companies as required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Verify that existing plant life designated to remain, is tagged or identified.

3.02 PROTECTION

A. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain, from damage.

B. Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain, as final landscaping.

C. Protect bench marks and existing structures from damage or displacement.

3.03 CLEARING

A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work.

B. Remove paving, curbs, and improvements designated.

C. Remove trees and shrubs indicated. Remove stumps, root system surface rock and other areas indicated or implied for completion of the project.

D. Clear undergrowth and deadwood, without disturbing subsoil. Strip and clear vegetation from areas designated to be filled, excavated, regraded, or landscaped.

3.04 REMOVAL

A. Remove debris, rock, and extracted plant life from site.

3.05 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate clean topsoil from areas to be further excavated, filled, re-landscaped, or regraded.

B. Stockpile in area designated on site to depth not exceeding 8 feet. Protect from erosion. Remove excess topsoil not being reused, from site.

END OF SECTION 02110

02110-1 Site Clearing

SECTION 02205

SOIL MATERIALS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Subsoil and topsoil materials.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Document:

The Geotechnical Engineering Report. The engineering study, subsurface exploration, boring location diagram, boring logs, laboratory test results, and geotechnical recommendations.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures,

Using 5.5 lb (2.49 Kg) Rammer and 12 inch (304.8 mm) Drop.

B. ASTM D2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Fill Material: Under slabs and within the zone of influence of foundation elements must be a material approved by the geotechnical engineer and as indicated in the geotechnical report.

B. Fill and Backfill Material: Other areas, foundation backfill, site grading, and pavement, should be clean site material or similar borrow material.

2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspection and testing will be performed by an independent laboratory, Contractor shall bear all related costs under provisions of General Requirements.

B. Tests and analysis of soil material will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D698.

C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest at no cost to

Owner.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 STOCKPILING

A. Stockpile materials on site at locations indicated or in areas that will not impact project completion.

B. Stockpile in sufficient quantities to meet project schedule and requirements.

C. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile apart to prevent mixing.

D. Direct surface water away from stockpile site to prevent erosion or deterioration of materials.

3.02 STOCKPILE CLEANUP

A. Remove stockpile, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to prevent free-standing surface water.

END OF SECTION 02205

02205-1 Soil Materials

SECTION 02211

ROUGH GRADING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Removal of topsoil and subsoil.

B. Cutting, grading, filling and rough contouring the site for site structures, building pads and paving.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Document:

The Geotechnical Engineering Report. The engineering study, subsurface exploration, boring location diagram, boring logs, laboratory test results, and geotechnical recommendations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Topsoil, Fill and Structural Fill: As specified in Section 02205.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain, from damage. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities.

C. Protect above and below grade utilities that remain.

D. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.

E. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

3.03 SUBSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate subsoil from areas to be further excavated, relandscaped, or regraded.

B. Stockpile in area designated on site to depth not exceeding 8 feet. Protect from erosion. Remove subsoil not being reused, from site.

C. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe.

3.04 FILLING

A. Fill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.

B. Place fill materials on continuous layers and compact in accordance with Schedule at end of Section.

C. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

D. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft. unless noted otherwise.

E. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas.

F. Remove surplus fill materials from site.

3.05 TOLERANCES

A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 1/10 foot.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of the General Requirements.

B. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D698.

C. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the Owner.

02211-1 Rough Grading

3.07 SCHEDULES

A. Structural Fill: (Building and Paving)

1.

2.

Fill Maximum 8 inches compacted depth.

Compact to minimum 95 percent of maximum density.

B. Subsoil Fill:

1. Fill Maximum 8 inches compacted depth.

2. Compact to minimum 90 percent of maximum density.

C. Topsoil Fill:

1. Fill Maximum 8 inches depth.

END OF SECTION 02211

02211-2 Rough Grading

SECTION 02222

EXCAVATING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Excavating for building foundations and footings.

B. Excavating for slabs-on-grade, paving, landscaping.

C. Excavating for site structures.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Document:

The Geotechnical Engineering Report. The engineering study, subsurface exploration, boring location diagram, boring logs, laboratory test results, and geotechnical recommendations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

B. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain, from damage.

C. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities.

D. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.

E. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving and curbs from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic.

3.02 EXCAVATION

A. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work.

B. Excavate subsoil required to accommodate building foundations, slabs-on-grade, paving and site structures, construction operations.

C. Machine slope banks to angle of repose or less, until shored.

D. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundation.

E. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation.

F. Hand trim excavation. Remove loose matter.

G. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cu yd measured by volume.

H. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work.

I. Correct areas over-excavated in accordance with Section 02223.

J. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site and remove excess material not being reused, from site.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of the General Requirements.

B. Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect excavations by methods required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation.

B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation, from freezing.

END OF SECTION 02222

02222-1 Excavating

SECTION 02223

BACKFILLING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Building perimeter and site structure backfilling to subgrade elevations.

B. Site filling and backfilling.

C. Fill under slabs-on-grade, paving.

D. Consolidation and compaction as scheduled.

E. Fill for over-excavation.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Document:

The Geotechnical Engineering Report. The engineering study, subsurface exploration, boring location diagram, boring logs, laboratory test results, and geotechnical recommendations.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate

Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb (2.49 Kg) Rammer and 12 inch (304.8 mm) Drop.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FILL MATERIALS

A. Fill: As specified in Section 02205.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify subdrainage, dampproofing or waterproofing installation has been inspected and completed.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.

B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of in situ compaction. Backfill with fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.

C. Scarify and proof roll subgrade surface to a depth of 4 inches to identify soft spots; fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.

3.03 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.

B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.

C. Fill, place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth.

D. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.

E. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. Backfill against supported foundation walls. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation walls.

F. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supports are in place.

G. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft. unless noted otherwise.

H. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.

I. Remove surplus backfill materials from site.

J. Leave fill material stockpile areas free of excess fill materials.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.

B. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.

02223-1 Backfilling

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of the General Requirements.

B. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D698.

C. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Proof roll compacted fill surfaces under slabs-on-grade, and paving.

3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect finished Work under provisions of the General Requirements.

B. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.

3.07 SCHEDULE

A. Interior Slab-On-Grade:

1. Fill compacted to 95 percent

2. Cover with Sand Fill 2 inches thick, compacted to 95 percent.

B. Exterior Side of Foundation Walls Retaining Walls and Over Granular Filter Material and Foundation

Perimeter Drainage:

1. Fill to subgrade elevation, each lift, compacted to 90 percent.

C. Fill Under Grass Areas:

1. Fill to 4 inches below finish grade.

D. Fill Under Asphalt or Concrete Paving:

1. Compact subsoil to 95 percent of its maximum dry density.

E. Fill to Correct Overexcavation:

1.

2.

Lean concrete to minimum compressive strength of 1000 psi.

Compact approved fill to 95 percent of its maximum dry density.

END OF SECTION 02223

02223-2 Backfilling

SECTION 02225

TRENCHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Excavating trenches for utilities from 5 feet outside building to municipal utilities.

B. Compacted fill from top of utility bedding to subgrade elevations.

C. Backfilling and compaction.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Document:

The Geotechnical Engineering Report. The engineering study, subsurface exploration, boring location diagram, boring logs, laboratory test results, and geotechnical recommendations.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate

Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb (2.49 Kg) Rammer and 12 inch (304.8 mm) Drop.

1.04 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as shown on drawings.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate all work as required.

B. Verify work associated with lower elevation utilities are complete before placing higher elevation utilities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FILL MATERIALS

A. Fill: As specified in Section 02205.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

B. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.

C. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic.

D. Maintain and protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain.

E. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of in situ compaction. Backfill with fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material.

3.02 EXCAVATION

A. Excavate subsoil required for utilities to municipal utilities.

B. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation and allow inspection.

C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.

D. Hand trim excavation. Remove loose matter.

E. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cu yd measured by volume.

F. Correct areas over excavated in accordance with Section 02222.

G. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site and remove excess material not being used, from site.

3.03 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.

B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.

C. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth.

D. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth.

02225-1 Trenching

E. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation perimeter drainage, conduit or pipes in trench.

F. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

G. Remove surplus fill materials from site.

H. Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Top Surface of Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of the General Requirements.

B. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D698.

C. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, compact, and retest at no additional cost to the owner.

3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect or reshape and recompact fills subjected to vehicular traffic during construction.

END OF SECTION 02225

02225-2 Trenching

SECTION 02281

TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Soil treatment for termite control below grade, to interior and exterior foundation perimeter.

1.02 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience approved by manufacturer, licensed and approved regulations.

1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements for application, application licensing, authority to use toxicant chemicals and in accordance with EPA.

B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of toxicants.

1.04 SEQUENCING

A. Apply toxicant 12 hours prior to installation of vapor barrier under slabs-on-grade and finish grading work outside foundations.

B. Notify Architect 24 hours prior to application.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of the General Requirements.

B. Warranty: Include coverage for damage and repairs to building and building contents caused by termites.

Repair damage. Re-treat where required.

C. Inspect and report annually to Owner in writing. Owner reserves the right to renew warranty for an additional five years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Toxicant Chemical: EPA and Local authority approved; (DRAGNET, DURSBAN TC, or as approved equal) synthetically color dyed to permit visual identification of treated soil.

B. Diluent: Recommended by toxicant manufacturer.

C.

Mix toxicant to manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify all the site conditions and become familiar with project scope.

B. Verify that soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, and ready to receive treatment.

C. Verify final grading is complete.

3.02 APPLICATION

A.

Spray apply or Inject toxicant in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Apply toxicant at locations indicated in Schedule at end of Section.

C. Apply extra treatment to structure penetration surfaces such as pipe or ducts, and soil penetrations such as grounding rods or posts.

D. Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment. Retreat around building perimeter after top soil has been placed, directly adjacent to foundation wall.

E. If inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-test.

3.03 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect finished Work, post signage to warn workers that soil poisoning has been applied.

B. Do not permit soil grading over treated work.

02281-1 Termite Control

3.04 SCHEDULES

A. Locations:

1.

2.

3.

Under Slabs-on-Grade including porches and stoops.

Both Sides of Foundation Surfaces.

Soil Within 10 feet of Building Perimeter.

END OF SECTION 02281

02281-2 Termite Control

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

SECTION 02520

PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING

A. Concrete sidewalks and stair steps, integral curbs, gutters, driveways and parking areas.

1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Paving: Designed for parking and light duty commercial vehicles.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301, requirements of Sections 03100, 03200 and 03300.

B. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout.

1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FORM MATERIALS

A. Wood or Steel form material, profiled to suit conditions.

B. Joint Filler: ANSI/ASTM D1751 type; 3/4 inch thick.

2.02 REINFORCEMENT

A. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ANSI/ASTM A185; 6x6 - 6x6 in flat sheets or coiled rolls.

B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615; 40 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars; unfinished.

2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C150 Air Entraining - Type IA Portland type, natural color.

B. Fine and Coarse Mix Aggregates: ASTM C33.

C. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.

D. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260.

E. Chemical Admixture: ASTM C494, as approved by Architect.

2.04 CONCRETE MIX - BY PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Mix concrete in accordance with, ACI 304. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.

B. Provide concrete to the following criteria:

1. Compressive Strength: Reference schedule below.

2.

3.

Slump: 1 to 2 inches.

Minimum Water/Cement Ratio: 6.5 gallon/5.5 sack.

4. Air Entrained: 5 percent.

C. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.

D. Use calcium chloride only when approved by Architect/Engineer.

E. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer.

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to the architect and appointed testing laboratory firm for review prior to commencement of work.

B. Tests on cement and aggregates shall be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify compacted subgrade, granular base and stabilized soil is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.

02520-1 Portland Cement Concrete Paving

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.

B. Coat surfaces of manholes, catch basins and frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete pavement.

C. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.

3.03 FORMING

A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, and profile.

B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.

C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement.

3.04 REINFORCEMENT

A. Place reinforcement at mid-height of slabs-on-grade.

B. Interrupt reinforcement at expansion joints.

C. Place dowels and reinforcement to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed.

D. Provide doweled joints 12 inch o.c. at interruptions of concrete.

3.05 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301.

B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, are not disturbed during concrete placement.

C. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.

D. Place concrete to indicated pattern.

3.06 JOINTS

A. Place 1/2 inch expansion joints at 60 foot intervals. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints.

B. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances. Recess top of filler

1/4 inch for sealant placement by Section 07900.

C. Provide scored or sawn joints at 4 feet intervals U.N.O. at sidewalks and curbs and 15 feet at pavement.

D. Saw cut contraction joints 3/16 inch wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut 1/3 into depth of slab.

3.07 FINISHING

A. Parking: Light broom.

B. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, radius to 1/4 inch and trowel joint edges.

C. Handicapped Ramps: Reference ADA.

D. Curbs and Gutters: Trowel finish.

E. Inclined Vehicular Ramps: Broom perpendicular to slope.

F. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Three concrete test cylinders shall be taken for every 100 or less cu yds of each class of concrete placed each day.

B. One additional test cylinder shall be taken during cold weather and cured on site under same conditions as concrete it represents.

C. One slump test shall be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.

3.09 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold

3.10 temperatures, and mechanical injury.

SCHEDULES

A. Concrete Sidewalks, Ramps, Stairs and Retaining Walls: 3,000 psi 28 day concrete, 4 inches thick, 6x6 -

10x10 inch mesh reinforcement, natural color Portland cement, broom finish, detectable warnings per

ADA at ramps and curb cuts.

B. Concrete Aprons and Driveways: 4,000 psi 28 day concrete, 6 inches thick, 6x6 - 6x6 W.W.F. reinforced, natural color Portland cement, broom finish.

END OF SECTION 02520

02520-2 Portland Cement Concrete Paving

SECTION 02810

IRRIGATION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes a complete irrigation system including but not limited to; wells, pumps, piping, valves, sprinklers, heads, specialties, controls, and wiring for pumps and automatic control of the well pumps and irrigation system.

B. Include all submittals, permits, and requirements associated with federal, state and local requirements and regulations.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Retain abbreviations and definitions that remain after this Section has been edited.

B. Circuit Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow.

C. Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit-piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure.

D. Irrigation Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure.

E. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

2. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

3. PA: Polyamide (nylon) plastic.

4. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

5. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

6. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.

7. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

8. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Test, Locate and drill all wells, consistent with federal, state and local authorities and regulations.

Design and size piping, controls and pumps consistent with federal, state and local authorities and regulations. Provide shop drawings for approval.

B. Design 100 percent water-coverage irrigation system for lawns and exterior plants indicated.

C. Retain paragraph below if complete system design and calculations are in the Contract Documents.

D. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Provide shop drawings for approval. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards. Maintain 100 percent water coverage of turf and planting areas indicated.

E. Retain paragraph and subparagraphs below with either paragraph above.

F. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping, valves, and specialties, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Irrigation Main Piping: 200 psig

.

2. Circuit Piping: 150 psig.

3. Drain Piping: 100 psig

.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include pressure ratings, rated capacities, and settings of selected models for the following:

1. Water wells, pumps, regulators.

2. Water hammer arresters.

3. General-duty valves.

4. Specialty valves.

5. Control-valve boxes.

6. Sprinklers.

7. Irrigation specialties.

8. Controllers. Include wiring diagrams.

9. Control cables. Include splice kits and conduit.

02810-1 Irrigation Systems

B. Shop Drawings: Show well locations, pumps, irrigation system piping, including plan layout, and locations, types, sizes, capacities, and flow characteristics of irrigation system piping components.

Include water meters, backflow preventers, valves, piping, sprinklers and devices, accessories, controls, and wiring. Show areas of sprinkler spray and overspray. Show wire size and number of conductors for each control cable.

C. Coordination Drawings: Show piping and major system components. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping, system components, adjacent utilities, and proximate structures.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For irrigation systems, to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures

Operation and Maintenance Data," include data for the following:

1. Automatic-control valves.

2. Sprinklers.

3. Controllers.

4. Pumps and wells

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Units: 2 Each

2. Emitter Units: 2 Each

3. Drip Tube Units: 2 Each

4. Valve Keys: 2 Each

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 40.

1. PVC Socket Fittings, Schedule 40: ASTM D 2466.

B. Transition Fittings: Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities -- Basic Materials and Methods" for transition fittings.

C. Dielectric Fittings: Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities -- Basic Materials and Methods" for dielectric fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities -- Basic Materials and Methods" for commonly used joining materials.

02810-2 Irrigation Systems

2.4 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

A. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves, nonrising-stem, gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet gate valve; with bronze stem and stem nut.

1. Minimum Working Pressure: 200 psig.

2. End Connections: Mechanical joint.

3. Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.

2.5

B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," bottom section with base of size to fit over valve, and approximately 5-inch diameter barrel.

1. Operating Wrenches: Furnish total of two steel, tee-handle operating wrench(es) with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.

C. MSS, Cast-Iron, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, Type I, Class 125, with solid wedge and flanged ends. Include all bronze trim, cast-iron body, and handwheel.

D. MSS, Cast-Iron, Rising-Stem Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, Type I, Class 125, with solid wedge and flanged ends. Include all bronze trim, cast-iron body, and handwheel.

E. Curb Valves: AWWA C800. Include bronze body, ball or ground-key plug, and wide tee head, with inlet and outlet matching piping material.

SERVICE BOXES FOR CURB VALVES: Similar to AWWA M44 requirements for cast-iron valve boxes. Include cast-iron telescoping top section of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," bottom section with base of size to fit over curb valve, and approximately 3inchdiameter barrel.

1. Shutoff Rods: Furnish total of two steel, tee-handle shutoff rod(s) with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve.

B. COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES: MSS SP-110, one-piece brass or bronze body with chrome-plated bronze ball, PTFE or TFE seats, and 400-psig minimum CWP rating.

C. PVC BALL VALVES: MSS SP-122, union type, with full-port ball detachable end connectors, and pressure rating not less than

150 psig

.

1. Material Option: MSS SP-122, of plastic other than PVC and suitable for potable water. Include threaded ends and pressure rating not less than 150 psig , unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 CONTROL-VALVE BOXES

A. Plastic Control-Valve Boxes: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping; designed for installing flush with grade. Include size as required for valves and service.

B. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 inch minimum to 3 inches maximum.

2.7 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Water Regulators: ASSE 1003, single-seated, direct-operated, water-pressure regulators, rated for 150psig minimum initial-inlet working pressure, with size, flow rate, and inlet and outlet pressures indicated. Include integral factory-installed or separate field-installed Y-pattern strainer that is compatible with unit for size and capacity.

B. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, with bellows or piston-type pressurized cushioning chamber and in sizes complying with PDI WH 201, Sizes A to F.

C. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.1. Include 4-1/2-inchdiameter dial, dial range of 2 times system operating pressure, and bottom outlet.

2.8 SPRINKLERS

A. Description: Brass or plastic housing and corrosion-resistant interior parts designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indicated, at available water pressure.

1. Flush, Surface Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment.

2. Bubblers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment.

3. Shrubbery Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment.

4. Pop-up, Spray Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment and stainless-steel retraction spring.

5. Pop-up, Rotary, Spray Sprinklers: Gear drive, full-circle and adjustable part-circle types.

6. Pop-up, Rotary, Impact Sprinklers: Impact drive, full-circle and part-circle types.

7. Aboveground, Rotary, Impact Sprinklers: Impact drive, full-circle and part-circle types.

02810-3 Irrigation Systems

2.9 AUTOMATIC-CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Exterior Control Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 4, weatherproof, with locking cover and two matching keys; include provision for grounding.

B. Control Transformer: 24-V secondary, with primary fuse.

C. Controller Stations for Automatic Control Valves: Each station is variable from approximately 5 to 60 minutes. Include switch for manual or automatic operation of each station.

D. Timing Device: Adjustable, 24-hour, 14-day clock, with automatic operations to skip operation any day in timer period, to operate every other day, or to operate 2 or more times daily.

1. Manual or Semiautomatic Operation: Allows this mode without disturbing preset automatic operation.

2. Nickel-Cadmium Battery and Trickle Charger: Automatically powers timing device during power outages.

3. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide-varistor type on each station and primary power.

E. Wiring: UL 493, Type UF-B multiconductor, with solid-copper conductors and insulated cable; suitable for direct burial.

1. Feeder-Circuit Cables: No. 12 AWG minimum, between building and controllers.

2. Low-Voltage, Branch-Circuit Cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between controllers and automatic control valves; color-coded different from feeder-circuit-cable jacket color; with jackets of different colors for multiple-cable installation in same trench.

3. Splicing Materials: Manufacturer's packaged kit consisting of insulating, spring-type connector or crimped joint and epoxy resin moisture seal; suitable for direct burial.

F. Concrete Base: Reinforced precast concrete with opening for wiring.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

B. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 12 inches below finished grades, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavement and slabs.

C. Install piping and wiring in sleeves under sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, and railroads.

1. Install piping sleeves by boring or jacking under existing paving if possible.

D. Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from

3/4 to 3 inches , to 12 inches below grade. Cover gravel or crushed stone with sheet of asphalt-saturated felt and backfill remainder with excavated material.

E. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following:

1. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 36 inches below finished grade, or not less than 18 inches below average local frost depth, whichever is deeper.

2. Circuit Piping: 12 inches

.

3. Drain Piping: 12 inches.

4. Sleeves: 24 inches

.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Set stakes to identify locations of proposed irrigation system. Obtain Architect's approval before excavation.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Location and Arrangement: Drawings indicate location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping at minimum uniform slope of 0.5 percent down toward drain valves.

C. Install piping free of sags and bends.

D. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

F. Install unions adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2 or smaller pipe connection.

G. Install flanges adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2-1/2 or larger pipe connection.

H. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping of dissimilar metals.

I. Install underground thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2774.

J. Lay piping on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions.

K. Install ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600.

02810-4 Irrigation Systems

L. Install PVC piping in dry weather when temperature is above 40 deg F 5 deg C. Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperatures above 40 deg F 5 deg C before testing unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer.

M. Install water regulators with shutoff valve and strainer on inlet and pressure gage on outlet. Install shutoff valve on outlet.

N. Water Hammer Arresters: Install between connection to building main and circuit valves in valve box.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities -- Basic Materials and Methods" for basic pipe joint construction.

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Underground Gate Valves: Install in valve box with top flush with grade.

1. Install valves and PVC pipe with restrained, gasketed joints.

B. Underground Curb Stops: Install in service box with top flush with grade.

C. Underground, Manual Control Valves: Install in manual control-valve box.

D. Control Valves: Install in control-valve box.

E. Drain Valves: Install in control-valve box.

3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Flush circuit piping with full head of water and install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is completed.

B. Install sprinklers at manufacturer's recommended heights.

C. Locate part-circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 4 inches from walls and 2 inches from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 AUTOMATIC-CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install freestanding controllers on precast concrete bases not less than 36 by 24 by 4 inches thick, and not less than 6 inches greater in each direction than overall dimensions of controller.

B. Install control cable in same trench as irrigation piping and at least 2 inches below piping. Provide conductors of size not smaller than recommended by controller manufacturer. Install cable in separate sleeve under paved areas if irrigation piping is installed in sleeve.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplates and signs on each automatic controller.

1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

B. Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities -- Basic Materials and Methods" for equipment nameplates and signs.

C. Warning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground, detectable warning tape over underground piping, during backfilling of trenches.

D. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for warning tapes.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connection, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate controllers and automatic control valves to confirm proper system operation.

02810-5 Irrigation Systems

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Remove and replace units and[retest / reinspect as specified above.

3.11 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Verify that controllers are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.

C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements in Division 16 Sections.

D. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.12 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust settings of controllers.

B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate of rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit.

C. Adjust sprinklers so they will be flush with, or not more than 1/2 inch above, finish grade.

3.13 CLEANING

A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices.

3.14 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain controller and automatic control valves.

END OF SECTION 02810

02810-6 Irrigation Systems

SECTION 02920

LAWNS AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Seeding.

2. Sodding.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling.

2. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough grading.

3. Division 2 Section "Subdrainage" for subsurface drainage.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

B. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

C. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.

D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately beneath planting soil.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging.

C. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer.

D. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for each type of planting.

E. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of lawns during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful lawn establishment.

1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when planting is in progress.

02920-1 Lawns and Grasses

B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the State

Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

C. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil.

1. Report suitability of topsoil for lawn growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory topsoil.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers.

B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in TPI's "Specifications for

Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in its

"Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding."

1.7 SCHEDULING

A.

Planting Restrictions: Plant according to manufacturer’s recommendations. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial

Completion.

1.8

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit.

LAWN MAINTENANCE

A. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is established, but for not less than the following periods:

1. Seeded Lawns: 60 days from date of Substantial Completion. a. When full maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if lawn is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.

B. Maintain and establish lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and other operations. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth lawn.

1. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch.

Anchor as required to prevent displacement.

C. Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and lawn-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep lawn uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches .

1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch.

Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas.

2. Water lawn at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week.

02920-2 Lawns and Grasses

D. Mow lawn as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 40 percent of grass height. Remove no more than 40 percent of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowing. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet.

E. Lawn Post fertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry.

1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. to lawn area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEED

A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology;

Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.

2.2

B. Seed Species: Seed of grass species as follows, with not less than 95 percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed:

1. Full Sun: Recommended species for area, soil, and climate.

2. Sun and Partial Shade: Recommended species for area, soil, and climate

3. Shade: Recommended species for area, soil, and climate.

TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent organic material content; free of stones 1/2 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.

1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of stockpiled surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. a. Supplement with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources when quantities are insufficient. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes.

2. Topsoil Source: Import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least

4 inches deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes.

3. Topsoil Source: Amend existing in-place surface soil to produce topsoil. Verify suitability of surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. a. Surface soil may be supplemented with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes.

2.3 PLANTING ACCESSORIES

A. Selective Herbicides: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer for application.

02920-3 Lawns and Grasses

2.4 FERTILIZER

A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid.

B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.

C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft.

of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.

D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.

2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.

2.5 MULCHES

A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley.

B. Peat Mulch: Sphagnum peat moss, partially decomposed, finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.

C. Peat Mulch: Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, containing partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent.

D. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight.

2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or sourceseparated or compostable mixed solid waste.

E. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic; free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors; with maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.

F. Nonasphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for slurry application; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors.

G. Asphalt Emulsion: ASTM D 977, Grade SS-1; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors.

02920-4 Lawns and Grasses

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive lawns and grass for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations.

1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding overspray.

3.3

B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soilbearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

LAWN PREPARATION

A. Limit lawn subgrade preparation to areas to be planted.

B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches Remove stones larger than 1/2 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening.

2. Thoroughly blend planting soil mix off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil mix. a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days. b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.

3. Spread planting soil mix to a depth of 4 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. a. Spread approximately one-half the thickness of planting soil mix over loosened subgrade.

Mix thoroughly into top 2 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil mix. b. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.

C. Unchanged Subgrades: If lawns are to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows:

1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil.

2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least of 6 inches

.

Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture.

3. Remove stones larger than 1/2 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter.

4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property.

D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.

E. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

F. Restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting.

02920-5 Lawns and Grasses

3.4 SEEDING

A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph . Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other.

1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.

B. Sow seed at the rate of 3 to 4 lb/1000 sq. ft

.

.

C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

D. Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:6 with erosion-control fiber mesh and 1:4 with erosioncontrol blankets installed and stapled according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches in loose depth over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment.

1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into topsoil with suitable mechanical equipment.

2. Bond straw mulch by spraying with asphalt emulsion at the rate of 10 to 13 gal./1000 sq. ft .

.

Take precautions to prevent damage or staining of structures or other plantings adjacent to mulched areas. Immediately clean damaged or stained areas.

F. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying any compost mulch, peat mulch, planting soil, or topsoil within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak and scatter uniformly to a depth of 3/16 inch and roll to a smooth surface.

3.5 SATISFACTORY LAWNS

A. Satisfactory Seeded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches.

B. Satisfactory Sodded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable lawn has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.

C. Satisfactory Plugged Lawn: At end of maintenance period, the required number of plugs has been established as well-rooted, viable patches of grass; and areas between plugs are free of weeds and other undesirable vegetation.

D. Satisfactory Sprigged Lawn: At end of maintenance period, the required number of sprigs has been established as well-rooted, viable plants; and areas between sprigs are free of weeds and other undesirable vegetation.

3.6

E. Reestablish lawns that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until lawns are satisfactory.

CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by lawn work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Erect barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain barricades throughout maintenance period and remove after lawn is established.

C. Remove erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.

END OF SECTION 02920

02920-6 Lawns and Grasses

SECTION 02930

EXTERIOR PLANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Trees.

2. Shrubs.

3. Ground cover.

4. Plants.

5. Edgings.

6. Planters.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for protection of existing trees and planting, topsoil stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing.

2. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation, filling, and rough grading and for subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials.

3. Division 2 Section "Subdrainage" for below-grade drainage of landscaped areas, paved areas, and wall perimeters.

4. Division 12 Section "Interior Plants" for interior plants, trees, and vines.

5. Division 12 Section "Interior Planters" for pots and urns for interior plantings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown, wrapped, tied, rigidly supported, and drum-laced as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.

B. Balled and Potted Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container.

C. Bare-Root Stock: Exterior plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than minimum root spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for kind and size of exterior plant required.

D. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted exterior plants grown in a container with wellestablished root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for kind, type, and size of exterior plant required.

E. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted exterior plants established and grown inground in a porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of fabric bag. Fabric bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of exterior plant.

F. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

02930-1 Exterior Plants

G. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

H. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.

I. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill, before placing planting soil.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following:

1. 5 lb of mineral mulch for each color and texture of stone required, in labeled plastic bags.

2. Edging materials and accessories, of manufacturer's standard size, to verify color selected.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, signed by product manufacturer, and complying with the following:

1. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products.

2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.

D. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer.

E. Material Test Reports: For existing surface soil and imported topsoil.

1.5

F. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for exterior plants.

G. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of exterior plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of exterior plants.

1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on

Project site when exterior planting is in progress.

B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

C. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil.

1. Report suitability of topsoil for plant growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory topsoil.

D. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock."

1. Selection of exterior plants purchased under allowances will be made by Architect, who will tag plants at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting.

E. Tree and Shrub Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above

02930-2 Exterior Plants

ground for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip-to-tip.

F. Observation: Architect may observe trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work.

Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.

1. Notify Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to site.

1.6

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver exterior plants freshly dug.

1. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.

B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery, except as approved by Architect. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of exterior plants during delivery. Do not drop exterior plants during delivery.

C. Handle planting stock by root ball.

D. Deliver exterior plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set exterior plants trees in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.

1. Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots in water for two hours if dried out.

2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material.

3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.

4. Water root systems of exterior plants stored on-site with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.

1. Spring Planting: As recommended for area, soil, and climate.

2. Fall Planting: As recommended for area, soil, and climate.

1.8

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit.

C. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after finish grades are established and before planting lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.

1. When planting trees and shrubs after lawns, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.

WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Warrant the following exterior plants, for the warranty period indicated, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.

1. Warranty Period for Trees and Shrubs: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Ground Cover and Plants: Six months from date of Substantial Completion.

3. Remove dead exterior plants immediately. Replace immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season.

4. Replace exterior plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period.

02930-3 Exterior Plants

5. A limit of one replacement of each exterior plant will be required, except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.

MAINTENANCE 1.9

A. Trees and Shrubs: Maintain for the following maintenance period by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, restoring planting saucers, tightening and repairing stakes and guy supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings.

1. Maintenance Period: Six months from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Ground Cover and Plants: Maintain for the following maintenance period by watering, weeding, fertilizing, and other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings:

1. Maintenance Period: Six months from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

B. Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.

C. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.

D. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.

E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs is shown, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number label to assure symmetry in planting.

2.2 SHADE AND FLOWERING TREES

A. Small Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, with relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1.

B. Multistem Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, with relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1.

2.3 DECIDUOUS SHRUBS

A. Form and Size: Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required by and measured according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape, and height of shrub.

2.4 CONIFEROUS EVERGREENS

A. Form and Size: Normal-quality, well-balanced, coniferous evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required, complying with ANSI Z60.1.

2.5 BROADLEAF EVERGREENS

A. Form and Size: Normal-quality, well-balanced, broadleaf evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required, complying with ANSI Z60.1.

02930-4 Exterior Plants

2.6 GROUND COVER PLANTS

A. Ground Cover: Provide ground cover of species indicated, established and well rooted in pots or similar containers, and complying with ANSI Z60.1.

B. Dichondra: Provide dichondra seed with 99 percent minimum pure seed, not less than 85 percent germination, and not more than 0.25 percent weed seed.

C. Dichondra: Provide dichondra plants grown in flats and suitable for cutting into plugs.

2.7 PLANTS

A. Annuals: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in bud but not yet in bloom.

B. Perennials: Provide healthy, field-grown plants from a commercial nursery, of species and variety shown or listed.

C. Fast-Growing Vines: Provide vines of species indicated complying with requirements in ANSI Z60.1 as follows:

1. Two-year plants with heavy, well-branched tops, with not less than 3 runners 18 inches or more in length, and with a vigorous well-developed root system.

2. Provide field-grown vines. Vines grown in pots or other containers of adequate size and acclimated to outside conditions will also be acceptable.

2.8 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 4 percent organic material content; free of stones 1/2 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.

1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of stockpiled surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. a. Supplement with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources when quantities are insufficient. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes.

2. Topsoil Source: Import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes.

3. Topsoil Source: Amend existing in-place surface soil to produce topsoil. Verify suitability of surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. a. Surface soil may be supplemented with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes.

2.9 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content

35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings.

B. Peat: Sphagnum peat moss, partially decomposed, finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of

3.4 to 4.8.

C. Peat: Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, containing partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent.

02930-5 Exterior Plants

D. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.

E. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth.

2.10 FERTILIZER

A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid.

B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.

C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.

D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.

2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.

2.11 MULCHES

A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs.

B. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings.

2.12 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS

A. Polyethylene Sheeting: ASTM D 4397, black, 0.006-inchminimum thickness.

B. Nonwoven Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd.

minimum.

C. Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz./sq. yd.

2.13 STAKES AND GUYS

A. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood, redwood, or pressure-preservativetreated softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2 by 2 inches by length indicated, pointed at one end.

B. Guy and Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, 2-strand, twisted, 0.106 inch in diameter.

C. Guy Cable: 5-strand, 3/16-inch diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-coated turnbuckles, a minimum of 3 inches long, with two 3/8-inch galvanized eyebolts.

D. Hose Chafing Guard: Reinforced rubber or plastic hose at least 1/2 inch in diameter, black, cut to lengths required to protect tree trunks from damage.

02930-6 Exterior Plants

E. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches long.

2.14 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS

A. Wood Edging: Of sizes shown, and wood stakes.

B. Steel Edging: Standard commercial-steel edging, rolled edge, fabricated in sections of standard lengths, with loops stamped from or welded to face of sections to receive stakes.

C. Aluminum Edging: Standard-profile extruded-aluminum edging, ASTM B 221 , alloy 6063-T6, fabricated in standard lengths with interlocking sections with loops stamped from face of sections to receive stakes.

D. Polyethylene Edging: Standard black polyethylene edging, V-lipped bottom, extruded in standard lengths, with 9-inch steel angle stakes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive exterior plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, and lawns and existing exterior plants from damage caused by planting operations.

B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soilbearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple exterior plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance of layout before planting. Make minor adjustments as required.

D. Lay out exterior plants at locations directed by Architect. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings.

E. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation.

1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting.

3.3 PLANTING BED ESTABLISHMENT

A. Loosen subgrade of planting beds to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1/2 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off

Owner's property.

B. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

C. Restore planting beds if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting.

3.4 TREE AND SHRUB EXCAVATION

A. Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward. Trim base leaving center area raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage. Do not further disturb base. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped stock.

02930-7 Exterior Plants

2. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock.

3. If drain tile is shown or required under planted areas, excavate to top of porous backfill over tile.

B. Subsoil removed from excavations may be used as backfill.

C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.

1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch diameter holes into free-draining strata or to a depth of 10 feet , whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material.

D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub pits.

E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs.

3.5 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING

A. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball flush with adjacent finish grades.

1. Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of root balls and partially from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix.

B. Set balled and potted stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball flush with adjacent finish grades.

1. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.

2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix.

C. Set fabric bag-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball flush with adjacent finish grades.

1. Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix.

D. Set and support bare-root stock in center of pit or trench with root collar or trunk flare, flush with adjacent finish grade. Spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface, and carefully work backfill around roots by hand. Puddle with water until backfill layers are completely saturated. Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while working backfill around roots and placing layers above roots. Tamp final layer of backfill. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.

E. Organic Mulching: Apply 2-inch average thickness of organic mulch extending 12 inches beyond edge of planting pit or trench. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems.

F. Wrap trees of 2-inch caliper and larger with trunk-wrap tape. Start at base of trunk and spiral cover trunk to height of first branches. Overlap wrap, exposing half the width, and securely attach without causing girdling. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning, and insect infestation; take corrective measures required before wrapping.

3.6 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING

A. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs as directed by Architect.

02930-8 Exterior Plants

B. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs according to standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees. Prune shrubs to retain natural character. Shrub sizes indicated are sizes after pruning.

3.7 GUYING AND STAKING

A. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch caliper. Stake trees of less than 2-inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip-out. Use a minimum of 2 stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend at least 72 inches above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. Support trees with two strands of tie wire encased in hose sections at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. Use the number of stakes as follows:

1. Use 2 stakes for trees up to 12 feet high and 2-1/2 inches or less in caliper; 3 stakes for trees less than 14 feet high and up to 4 inches in caliper. Space stakes equally around trees.

B. Guying and Staking: Guy and stake trees exceeding 14 feet in height and more than 3 inches in caliper, unless otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than 3 guys to stakes 30 inches long, driven to grade.

1. For trees more than 6 inches in caliper, anchor guys to pressure-preservative-treated deadmen 8 inches in diameter and 48 inches long buried at least 36 inches below grade. Provide turnbuckles for each guy wire and tighten securely.

2. Attach flags to each guy wire, 30 inches above finish grade.

3. Paint turnbuckles with luminescent white paint.

3.8 PLANTERS

A. Planters: Place a layer of gravel at least 4 inches thick in bottom of planters, cover with nonwoven fabric, and fill with planter soil mix. Place soil in lightly compacted layers to an elevation of 1-1/2 inches below top of planter, allowing natural settlement.

1. Planter Soil Mix: One part topsoil, one part coarse sand, one part peat, and 3 lb of dolomitic limestone per cubic yard of mix.

3.9 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING

A. Set out and space ground cover and plants as indicated or recommended.

B. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots, and backfill with planting soil.

C. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water.

D. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.

E. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock.

3.10 PLANTING BED MULCHING

A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches .

B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting beds and other areas indicated.

1. Organic Mulch: Apply 2-inch average thickness of organic mulch, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch against plant stems.

2. Mineral Mulch: Apply 2-inch average thickness of mineral mulch, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch against plant stems.

3.11 EDGING INSTALLATION

02930-9 Exterior Plants

A. Wood Edgings: Install wood headers or edgings where indicated. Anchor with wood stakes spaced up to 36 inches apart, driven at least 1 inch below top elevation of header or edging. Use 2 galvanized nails per stake to fasten headers and edging; length as needed to penetrate both members and provide

1/2-inch clinch at point. Predrill stakes if needed to avoid splitting.

B. Steel Edging: Install steel edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately 30 inches apart, driven below top elevation of edging.

C. Aluminum Edging: Install aluminum edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor with aluminum stakes spaced approximately 36 inches apart, driven below top elevation of edging.

D. Plastic Edging: Install plastic edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately 36 inches apart, driven through upper base grooves or Vlip of edging.

3.12 TREE GRATE INSTALLATION

A. Tree Grates: Set grate segments flush with adjoining surfaces as shown on Drawings. Shim from supporting substrate with soil-resistant plastic. Maintain a 3-inch (75-mm-) minimum growth radius around base of tree; break away units of casting, if necessary, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.13 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. During exterior planting, keep adjacent pavings and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. Protect exterior plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and others. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged exterior planting.

3.14 DISPOSAL

A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 02930

02930-10 Exterior Plants

SECTION 03100

CONCRETE FORMWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.

B. Openings for other work.

C. Form accessories.

D. Form stripping.

1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site per the suppliers and/or manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Store off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture.

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate this Section with other Sections of work which require attachment of components to formwork.

B. If formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement before proceeding, request instructions from Architect/Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WOOD FORM MATERIALS

A. Form Materials: At the discretion of the Contractor.

2.02 PREFABRICATED FORMS

A. Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum gage matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces.

B. Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished concrete surfaces.

2.03 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Form Ties: Removable or Snap-off type, metal, size and shape to minimize filling, waterproofing and refinishing concrete surfaces.

B. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete, or absorb moisture, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete.

C. Corners: Chamfer, exposed edges 1/2 inch unless otherwise noted or detailed on the drawings.

D. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, 22 gage thick, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork.

E. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel 22 gage thick, longest possible lengths, with alignment splines for joints, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork.

F. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.

G. Waterstops: Rubber Polyvinyl chloride, minimum 1,750 psi tensile strength, minimum 50 degrees F to plus

175 degrees F working temperature range, maximum possible lengths, ribbed profile, preformed corner sections, heat welded jointing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings.

3.02 EARTH FORMS

A. Earth forms if permitted, hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete.

3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORK

A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of

ACI 301.

03100-1 Concrete Formwork

B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to over stressing by construction loads.

C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.

D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.

E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members which are not indicated on Drawings.

F. Provide chamfer strips on external corners of beams joists columns and exposed decorative concrete edges.

G.

Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Protect forms from moisture or crushing.

3.04 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT

A.

Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.

C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings which are effected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.

3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS

A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work.

B. Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete.

C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other Work.

D. Position recessed reglets for brick veneer masonry anchors to spacing and intervals specified in Section

04300.

E. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.

F. Install waterstops continuous without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints watertight.

G. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection.

Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.

H. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.

3.06 FORM CLEANING

A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.

B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.

C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.

D. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.

3.07 FORMWORK TOLERANCES

A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301. Construct and align formwork for elevator hoistway in accordance with ANSI/ASME A17.1.

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.

B. Do not reuse wood formwork more than 2 times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork.

3.09 FORM REMOVAL

A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and

B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.

C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged.

Discard damaged forms.

END OF SECTION 03100

03100-2 Concrete Formwork

SECTION 03200

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Reinforcing steel bars, wire fabric and accessories for cast-in-place concrete.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel and wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice and ACI 301.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Design reinforcement under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Kansas.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 40, 60, or 75 ksi yield grade as indicated on the drawings; deformed billet steel bars, unfinished.

B. Reinforcing Steel Plain Bar and Rod Mats: ASTM A704, ASTM A615, Grade 40 or 60 as indicated on the drawings; steel bars or rods, unfinished.

C. Stirrup Steel: ANSI/ASTM A82, unfinished.

D. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A815; in flat sheets or coiled rolls; unfinished.

2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type.

B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture.

C. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed Concrete Surfaces:

Plastic coated steel type; size and shape as required.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice.

B. Weld reinforcement in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4.

C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings, at point of minimum stress.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PLACEMENT

A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position.

B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.

C. Accommodate placement of formed openings.

03200-1 Concrete Reinforcement

D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as indicated on the drawings or if not indicated as follows:

Item Coverage

Beams

Column Ties

Walls (exposed to weather or backfill)

1 1/2 inch

1 1/2 inch

2 inch

Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth 3 inch

Slabs on Fill 3/4 inch

END OF SECTION 03200

03200-2 Concrete Reinforcement

SECTION 03300

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Cast-in-place concrete floors, foundation walls, retaining walls, steps and ramps.

B. Floors and slabs on grade.

C. Control, expansion and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work, including joint sealants.

D. Equipment pads, light pole base and flagpole base.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements.

B. Product Data: Provide data on joint devices, attachment accessories.

C. Samples: Submit 2-inch long samples of expansion/contraction joint.

D.

Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent Work.

1.03 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which are concealed from view.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.

B. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work.

C. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.

D. Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal or Type III - High Early Strength Type V - Sulfate Resistant as required Portland type.

B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33.

C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.

2.02 ADMIXTURES

A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260.

B. Chemical: ASTM C494 Type A - Water Reducing, Type B - Retarding, Type C - Accelerating, Type D

- Water Reducing and Retarding, Type E - Water Reducing and Accelerating.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion, polyvinyl acetate, Latex emulsion, two component modified epoxy resin, non-solvent two component polysulfide epoxy, mineral filled polysulfide polymer epoxy, mineral filled polysulfide polymer epoxy resin, or Polyamid cured epoxy as approved.

B. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil thick clear polyethylene film, type recommended for below grade application.

C. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of nonmetallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and

7,000 psi in 28 days.

2.04 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS

A. Joint Filler:

1. Joint Filler Type A: ASTM D1751; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/4 inch thick.

2. Joint Filler Type B: ASTM D1752; Closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam, resiliency recovery of 95 percent if not compressed more than 50 percent of original thickness.

03300-1 Cast-in-Place Concrete

B. Expansion and Contraction Joint Devices: ASTM B221 alloy, extruded aluminum; resilient elastomeric, vinyl, or neoprene, filler strip with a Shore A hardness of 35 to permit plus or minus 25 percent joint movement with full recovery; extruded aluminum or vinyl cover plate, of longest manufactured length at each location, recess mounted; color as selected.

C. Sealant: Rubber or synthetic rubber compound.

2.05 CONCRETE MIX

A. Mix concrete in accordance with ACI 304. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.

B. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301.

C. Provide concrete with compressive strength of 3,500 psi at 28 days.

D. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.

E. Use calcium chloride only when approved by Architect/Engineer.

F. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer.

G. Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to exterior.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.

B. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.

3.03 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301.

B. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations.

C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion and contraction joints are not disturbed during concrete placement.

D. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by sealant applied between overlapping edges and ends or taping edges and ends.

E. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor barrier material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.

F. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with 1/2 inch thick joint filler.

G. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

H. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface. Conform to Section

07900 for finish joint sealer requirements.

I.

Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

J. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

K. Install joint device anchors. Maintain correct position to allow joint cover to be flush with floor and wall finish.

L. Install joint covers in longest practical length, when adjacent construction activity is complete.

M. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07900.

N. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken.

O. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.

P. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur where possible.

Q. Place floor slabs in checkerboard or saw cut pattern indicated.

R. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness.

S. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft.

03300-2 Cast-in-Place Concrete

3.04 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Provide formed concrete surfaces to be left exposed concrete walls columns beams joists with smooth rubbed finish.

B. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.

C. Wood float surfaces which will receive quarry tile, ceramic tile, or terrazzo with full bed setting system.

D. Steel trowel surfaces which will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set quarry tile, or thin set ceramic tile.

E. Steel trowel surfaces which are scheduled to be exposed.

F. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1/4 inch per foot or as indicated on drawings.

3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.

C. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308.

D. Ponding: Maintain 100 percent coverage of water over floor slab areas continuously for 4 days.

E. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet for 7 days.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301 and under provisions of the

General Requirements.

B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm.

C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work.

D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements.

E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 75 or less cu yds of each class of concrete placed.

F. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents.

G. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.

3.07 PATCHING

A. Allow Architect/Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms.

B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect/Engineer upon discovery.

C. Patch imperfections as directed or in accordance with ACI 301.

3.08 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements.

B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect/Engineer.

C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of

Architect/Engineer for each individual area.

END OF SECTION 03300

03300-3 Cast-in-Place Concrete

SECTION 04100

MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Mortar and grout for masonry, to match existing.

1.02 GENERAL

A. All notes or specifications on structural drawings shall override any discrepancies listed.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements.

B. Include design mix, indicate whether the Proportion or Property specification of ASTM C270 is to be used, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1 .

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of the General Requirements.

B. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.

B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type S.

C. Premix Mortar: ASTM C387, Type S.

D. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type.

E. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

F. Water: Clean and potable.

G. Bonding Agent: Latex or Epoxy type.

2.02 MORTAR COLOR

A. Mortar Color: Mineral oxide pigment; color to match adjacent CMU color, as selected by Architect.

2.03 MORTAR MIXES

A. Mortar For Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type M or S using the Property specification.

B. Mortar For Non-Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type M or S using the Property specification.

C. Mortar For Engineered Masonry: ASTM C270, Type M or S using the Property specification.

D. Pointing Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N or O using the Property specification.

2.04 MORTAR MIXING

A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed for immediate use.

B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.

C.

Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration.

D. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.

04100-1 Mortar and Masonry Group

E. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing.

F. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), or two-and-one-half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F.

2.05 GROUT MIXES

A. Bond Beams, and Lintels: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; premixed type in accordance with ASTM C94.

B. Engineered Masonry: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; premixed type in accordance with ASTM C94.

2.06 GROUT MIXING

A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94.

B.

Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions; mix uniformly.

C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A.

Install mortar and grout in accordance with premix mortar manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install mortar and grout in accordance with ASTM C270.

C. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids.

D. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches or two CMU courses without consolidating grout by rodding.

E. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout.

F. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces.

END OF SECTION 04100

04100-2 Mortar and Masonry Group

SECTION 04300

UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Concrete masonry or brick units.

B. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements.

B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry and brick units and fabricated wire reinforcement.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of the General Requirements.

B. Accept units on site. Inspect for damage.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

C. Hot Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Hot or Cold Weather Masonry Construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Non-Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C90, Heavy weight, sand, light weight will not be accepted. Type I - Moisture Controlled.

B. Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 8 and 4 x 16 x 8 inches. Provide special units for 90 degree corners.

C. Style and Color.

1. Moisture controlled with coloring additive. Coloring to be determined by Architect.

2. Provide as indicated on drawings:

2.02 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641 after fabrication, No. 9 side rods with No. 9 cross ties.

1. Manufacturers: a. DUR-O-WALL b. c.

TRU-MESH

BET-R-WALL

B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 40 or 60 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, uncoated finish.

C. Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, 3/16 inch thick, adjustable, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A123 steel finish.

1. Manufacturers: a. DUR-O-WALL b. TRU-MESH c. BET-R-WALL

2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT

A. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04100.

2.04 FLASHINGS

A. Plastic Flashings: Sheet polyvinyl chloride or polyethylene; 20 mil thick.

04300-1 Unit Masonry System

B. Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07900.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber, Neoprene, Polyvinyl chloride material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, heat or cement fused joints.

B. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, polyurethane or rubber; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding.

C. Building Paper: No. 30 asphalt saturated felt.

D. Nailing Strips: Softwood, preservative treated for moisture resistance, dovetail shape, sized to masonry joints.

E. Weeps: Preformed plastic cotton wick filled, or cotton rope.

F. Cavity Vents: Molded polyvinyl chloride grilles; insect resistant.

G. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located.

C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections.

B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing.

3.03 COURSING

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.

C. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Bond: Running unless otherwise indicated.

2.

3.

Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.

Mortar Joints: Concave, unless noted otherwise.

D. Brick Units:

1.

2.

3.

Bond: Running, unless noted otherwise.

Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches.

Mortar Joints: Concave, unless noted otherwise.

3.04 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.

B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.

C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.

D. Remove excess mortar as work progresses.

E. Interlock intersections and external corners.

F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.

G. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges.

Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.

H. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled, resilient base is scheduled, cavity insulation vapor barrier adhesive is applied, or bitumen dampproofing is applied.

I. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint.

J. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler.

3.05 WEEPS

A. Install weeps in veneer at 32 inches oc horizontally above through-wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls.

3.06 CAVITY WALL

A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weeps.

04300-2 Unit Masonry System

B. Build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to receive cavity insulation and air/vapor barrier adhesive.

3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc.

B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings.

Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.

C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls.

D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.

E. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position.

F. At masonry veneer, embed wall ties in masonry back-up to bond veneer at maximum 16 inches oc vertically and 36 inches oc horizontally. Place at maximum 3 inches oc each way around perimeter of openings, within 12 inches of openings.

3.08 MASONRY FLASHINGS

A. Extend flashings horizontally at foundation walls, above ledge or shelf angles and lintels, under parapet caps, and at bottom of walls.

B. Turn flashing up minimum 8 inches and bed into mortar joint of masonry, seal to concrete, seal or underlap at sheathing over framed back-up.

C. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.

D. Turn flashing, fold, and seal at corners, bends, and interruptions.

3.09 GROUTED COMPONENTS

A. Reinforce bond beam as indicated or detailed.

B. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.

C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position.

D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.

E. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of opening.

3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.

B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance.

D. Form expansion joint as detailed.

3.11 BUILT-IN WORK

A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door and glazed frames, fabricated metal frames, window frames, wood nailing strips, fireplace accessories, anchor bolts, plates, and other items to be built-in the work and furnished by other sections.

B. Install built-in items plumb and level.

C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings.

D. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration.

3.12 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch.

B. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch.

C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more.

D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more.

E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft.

F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft.

G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.

3.13 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.

B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.

04300-3 Unit Masonry System

3.14 CLEANING

A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.

B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

3.15 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect finished Work.

B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities.

END OF SECTION 04300

04300-4 Unit Masonry System

SECTION 04700

MANUFACTURED MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Manufactured stone veneer, Manufactured brick veneer, Manufactured stone trim, and application materials.

B. Building Materials Evaluation Commission.

C. International Code Council (ICC):

1. ES Report., UBC Standard No. 14-1, Kraft Waterproof Building Paper.

D. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) of The Masonry Society.

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): Listing in Material Approval Guide. UL 723, Standard for Safety for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Reference Section 01 33 00

Submittal Procedures; submit following items:

1. Product Data: Manufactured masonry and application materials including mortar color charts,

and weather resistant barrier.

2. Samples: Panel containing full-size samples of specified manufactured masonry showing full range of colors and textures complete with specified mortar. a. Actual size of masonry sample approximately 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).

3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Qualifications: Proof of manufacturer qualifications, Proof of installer qualifications,

Certificates: ICC-ES Repor, Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five years experience in producing manufactured masonry.

2. Installer Qualifications: Company with documented experience in installation of manufactured masonry including minimum 5 projects within 500 mile radius of this Project.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Reference Section 01 66 00

Product Storage and Handling Requirements.

B. Follow manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Store moisture-sensitive materials in weather protected enclosures.

1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain materials and ambient temperature in area of installation at minimum 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) prior to, during, and for 48 hours following installation.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty against defects in manufacturing for a period of 50 years following date of Final Acceptance.

1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Furnish extra manufactured stone material in a variety of shapes and sizes in quantity equal to three percent of the installed stone.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Centurion, Rubble, 1.5” – 2” min. unit thickness.

B. Substitutions: As approved equal prior to bidding.

2.02 MANUFACTURED MASONRY MATERIALS

A. As selected by Owner or to Match Existing at additional Phases.

04700-1 Manufactured Masonry

2.03 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Weather Resistant Barrier: [Kraft waterproof building paper, UBC Standard No. 14-1] [No. 15, Type

I, asphalt saturated felt, ASTM D 226].

B. Metal Lath: [2.5 lb (1.4 kg/m

2

) galvanized expanded metal lath] [18 (1.3 mm) gauge woven wire mesh] [3.4 lb (1.8 kg/m

2

) galvanized expanded rib lath].

C. Fasteners:

1. Into Wood Studs: Minimum 0.120 inch (3 mm) shank diameter galvanized nails or staples of sufficient length to penetrate 1-3/8 inches (35 mm) minimum into the stud.

2. Into Metal Studs: Minimum 7/16 inch (11.1 mm) head diameter, corrosion-resistant , selfdrilling, self tapping, pancake head screws of sufficient length to penetrate 3/8 inch (10 mm) minimum into the stud.

D. Mortar: Premixed Type N or mortar mixed using components and proportions following manufactured masonry manufacturer's installation instructions. Comply with ASTM C 270.

1. Mortar Color: Iron oxide pigments.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates upon which manufactured masonry will be installed.

B. Coordinate with responsible entity to correct unsatisfactory conditions.

C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Prevent work from occurring on the opposite of walls to which manufactured masonry is applied during and for 48 hours following installation of the manufactured masonry.

B. Surface Preparation: Follow manufacturer's instructions designated below for the appropriate type of manufactured masonry and substrate.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Per the manufacturers recommendations provide lath and scratch coat of ½” min. thickness, with ¼” min. set coat. Total min. thickness including masonry unit of 2”- 2.5”.

B. Install Cultured Stone

® products in accordance with manufacturer's Cultured Stone

® installation instructions using grouted joints.

C. Install Cultured Brick

® products in accordance with manufacturer's Cultured Brick

® installation instructions.

D. Install architectural trim products in accordance with manufacturer's Cultured Stone

® installation instructions.

E. Install/Apply Related Materials specified above in accordance with type of substrate and manufactured masonry manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean manufactured masonry in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished work from rain during and for 48 hours following installation.

B. Protect finished work from damage during remainder of construction period.

END OF SECTION 04700

04700-2 Manufactured Masonry

SECTION 05120

STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Structural steel framing members and support members.

B. Base plates.

C. Grouting under base plates.

1.02 GENERAL

A. All notes or specifications on structural drawings shall override any discrepancies listed.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, openings, attachments and fasteners.

2. Connections and Connections not detailed.

3. Cambers, and loads.

4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.

C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.

B. Perform Work in accordance with AISC - Specification for Architectural Exposed Structural Steel.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 5 years’ documented experience.

B. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 5 years’ documented experience.

C. Design connections not detailed on the Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural

Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Kansas.

1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on shop drawings and/or as instructed by the manufacturer.

1.07 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

A. All miscellaneous items required to complete the work in accordance with the intent of the Drawings and

Specifications, shall be furnished and installed, regardless of whether or not specifically shown or described. Such items include masonry anchors, dovetail slots, dowels and cramps, loose or embedded items of structural shapes, plates, bars, shield, and other fastening devices which may or may not be provided with the indicated or specified items shall also be furnished and installed as required for attachment and support.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Reference drawings and notes on the drawings.

2.02 FINISH

A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 2.

B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete or high strength bolts.

05120-1 Structural Steel

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

3.02 ERECTION

A. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

B. Field weld components and shear studs indicated on Drawings and/or shop drawings.

C. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer.

D. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.

E. Grout under base plates as indicated.

3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION 05120

05120-2 Structural Steel

SECTION 06100

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2

1.3

SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Framing with dimension lumber.

2. Framing with timber.

3. Framing with engineered wood products.

4. Wood blocking, canta, and nailers.

5. Utility shelving.

6. Wood furring.

7. Sheathing.

8. Subflooring and underlayment.

9. Plywood backing panels.

10. Building wrap.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

B. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer.

1.4

C. Source Limitations for Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire-retardant-treated wood product through one source from a single producer.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.

Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American

Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.

3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.

06100-1 Rough Carpentry

B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project.

1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

C. Wood Structural Panels:

1. Plywood: DOC PS 1.

2. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.

3. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated.

4. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction

Guide: Residential & Commercial."

5. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 lumber except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to

AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and one of the following: a. Chromated copper arsenate (CCA). b. Ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate (ACZA). c. Ammoniacal, or amine, copper quat (ACQ). d. Copper bis (dimethyldithiocarbamate) (CDDC). e. Ammoniacal copper citrate (CC). f. Copper azole, Type A (CBA-A). g. Oxine copper (copper-8-quinolinolate) in a light petroleum solvent.

2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the

American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.

4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, provide materials that comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 lumber and AWPA C27 plywood. Identify fire-retardanttreated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated wood after exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664, for lumber and ASTM D 5516, for plywood

06100-2 Rough Carpentry

2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

3. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.

4. Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise indicated.

B. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards

Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.

B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade.

C. Exterior and Load-Bearing Walls Construction or No. 2 grade.

D. Ceiling Joists (Non-Load-Bearing): Construction or No. 2 grade.

E. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: Construction or No. 1 grade.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.

2. Blocking.

3. Cants.

4. Nailers.

5. Furring.

6. Grounds.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content.

C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content.

D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content.

E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.6 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS

A. Veneer Lumber: A composite of wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.

B. Parallel-Strand Lumber: A composite of wood strand elements with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.

C. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units complying with APA PRI-400; depths and performance ratings not less than those indicated.

D. Rim Boards: Performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401.

2.7 SHEATHING

A. Reference drawings, the following are minimums where sheathing is not noted on drawings.

06100-3 Rough Carpentry

B. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0.

2. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch.

C. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0.

2. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch.

D. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum

Corp.

2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 5/8 inch thick.

3. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation.

E. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16.

2. Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch.

F. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16.

2. Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch.

2.8

2.9

PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fireretardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch thick.

FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this

Article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594,

Alloy Group 1 or 2 .

2.10 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and size indicated, and as follows:

06100-4 Rough Carpentry

1. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project.

2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

D. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inchlong seat and 1-1/4-inchwide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth.

1. Thickness: 0.050 inch .

E. I-Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inchlong seat and 1-1/4-inchwide nailing flanges full depth of joist. Nailing flanges provide lateral support at joist top chord.

1. Thickness: 0.050 inch .

F. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member.

1. Strap Width: 1-1/2 inches .

2. Thickness: 0.050 inch .

G. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.062 inch thick, length to suit joist size and spacing.

H. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch above base and with 2-inchminimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch thick.

I. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports.

1. Width: 3/4 inch .

2. Thickness: 0.050 inch .

3. Length: 16 inches.

J. Rafter Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-1/2 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick. Tie fastens to side of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below.

K. Rafter Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/4 inches wide by 0.062 inch thick. Tie fits over top of rafter or truss and fastens to both sides of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below.

L. Floor-to-Floor Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying upper floor wall studs to band joists and lower floor studs, 1-1/4 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick by 36 inches long.

M. Hold-Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor bolts or to other hold-downs with threaded rods and designed with first of two bolts placed seven bolt diameters from reinforced base.

N. Wall Bracing: T-shaped bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 1-1/8 inches wide by 9/16 inch deep by 0.034 inch thick with hemmed edges.

O. Wall Bracing: Angle bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 15/16 by 15/16 by 0.040 inch thick with hemmed edges.

06100-5 Rough Carpentry

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Building Paper: Asphalt-saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated.

B. Building Wrap: Air-retarder sheeting made from polyolefins; cross-laminated films, woven strands, or spun-bonded fibers; coated or uncoated; with or without perforations; and complying with

ASTM E 1677, Type I.

1. Thickness: Not less than 3 mils

2. Permeance: Not less than 10 perms

3. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less per ASTM E 84.

4. Allowable Exposure Time: Not less than three months.

C. Building Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.

D. Sheathing Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing and recommended by sheathing manufacturer for use with type of sheathing required.

E. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch ; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

F. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

G. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers.

H. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood.

D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.

2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.

3. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof

Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in the Uniform Building Code.

4. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in the BOCA National Building Code.

5. Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the Standard Building Code.

6. Table 602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table 602.3(2), "Alternate

Attachments," in the International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code.

E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required.

06100-6 Rough Carpentry

F. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler.

3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

3.3

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement.

C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than

1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Do not splice structural members between supports.

D. Where built-up beams or girders of 2-inch nominaldimension lumber on edge are required, fasten together with 2 rows of 20d nails spaced not less than 32 inches o.c. Locate one row near top edge and other near bottom edge.

3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. General: Arrange studs so wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-loadbearing partitions. Anchor or nail plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominalsize wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions.

C. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted wood blocks of 2-inch nominalthick lumber of same width as framing members.

D. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs.

1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs with headers not less than 4-inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width.

2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 72 inches and less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated.

E. Provide bracing in exterior walls, at both walls of each external corner, full-story height, unless otherwise indicated. Provide one of the following:

06100-7 Rough Carpentry

F. Provide bracing in walls, at locations indicated, full-story height, unless otherwise indicated. Provide one of the following:

1. Diagonal bracing at 45-degree angle using let-in 1-by-4-inch nominal size boards.

2. Diagonal bracing at 45-degree angle using metal bracing.

3. Plywood panels not less than 48 by 96 inches applied vertically.

4. Oriented-strand-board panels not less than 48 by 96 inches applied vertically.

5. Particleboard sheathing panels not less than 48 by 96 inches applied vertically.

6. In lieu of bracing at corners or at locations indicated, continuous gypsum sheathing may be provided in panels not less than 48 by 96 inches applied vertically.

7. In lieu of bracing at corners or at locations indicated, continuous fiberboard sheathing, intermediate type, may be provided in panels not less than 48 by 96 inches applied vertically.

3.5 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters.

1. Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to rafters from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to first joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1-by-8-inch nominal size or 2-by-4inch nominalsize stringers spaced 48 inches o.c. crosswise over main ceiling joists.

B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and use metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers.

1. At valleys, provide double-valley rafters of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against valley rafters.

2. At hips, provide hip rafter of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip rafter.

C. Provide collar beams (ties) as indicated or, if not indicated, provide 1-by-6-inch nominalsize boards between every third pair of rafters, but not more than 48 inches o.c. Locate below ridge member, at third point of rafter span. Cut ends to fit roof slope and nail to rafters.

3.6

D. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions, if any.

FIBERBOARD SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Fasten fiberboard sheathing panels to intermediate supports and then at edges and ends. Use galvanized roofing nails; comply with manufacturer's recommended spacing and referenced fastening schedule. Drive fasteners flush with surface of sheathing and locate perimeter fasteners at least 3/8 inch from edges and ends.

B. Install sheathing vertically with long edges parallel to, and centered over, studs. Install solid wood blocking where end joints do not occur over framing. Allow 1/8-inch open space between edges and ends of adjacent units. Stagger horizontal joints, if any.

C. Cover sheathing as soon as practical after installation to prevent deterioration from wetting.

3.7 BUILDING PAPER APPLICATION

A. Apply building paper horizontally with 2-inch overlap and 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. Cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch overlap.

3.8 BUILDING WRAP APPLICATION

A. Cover wall sheathing with building wrap as indicated.

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch overlap.

3. Seal seams, edges, and penetrations with tape.

4. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.

06100-8 Rough Carpentry

3.9 SHEATHING TAPE APPLICATION

A. Apply sheathing tape to joints between sheathing panels and at items penetrating sheathing. Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing.

END OF SECTION 06100

06100-9 Rough Carpentry

SECTION 06112

FRAMING AND SHEATHING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Structural roof framing.

B. 2 x 4, 2 x 6 stud wall framing.

C. Roof sheathing.

D. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.

E. Telephone and electrical panel boards.

F. Concealed wood blocking for support of wall cabinets, wood trim and rails.

1.02 GENERAL

A. All notes or specifications on street drawings shall override any discrepancies listed.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ALSC: American Lumber Standards Committee - Softwood, Lumber Standards.

B. APA: American Plywood Association.

C. NFPA: National Forest Products Association.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies:

1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.

2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 LUMBER MATERIALS

A. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA.

B.

Truss Framing: Stress Group, Douglas Fir species, standard grade, 2” x 6” size classification, 19 percent maximum moisture content.

C. Studding: Stress Group, Douglas Fir species, standard grade, 2” x 4” size classification, 19 percent maximum moisture content.

2.02 SHEATHING MATERIALS

A. Plywood Roof and Wall Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, AC faces.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing.

3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel.

B. Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: All as approved by Architect.

C. Building Paper: No. 15 asphalt felt.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 FRAMING

A. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position.

B. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

C. Place horizontal members flat, crown side up.

D. Construct load bearing framing members full length without splices.

E. Double members at openings over 24 inches wide. Space short studs over and under opening to stud spacing.

06112-1 Framing and Sheathing

F. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joists. Frame rigidly into joists.

G. Bridge joists framing in excess of 8 feet span as detailed at mid-span. Fit bridging at ends of members.

H. Place full width continuous sill flashings under framed walls on cementitious foundations. Lap flashing joint 4 inches.

I. Place sill gasket directly on sill flashing. Puncture gasket clean and fit tight to protruding foundation anchor bolts.

3.02 SHEATHING

A. Secure roof sheathing perpendicular to framing members with ends staggered and sheet ends over firm bearing. Use sheathing clips between sheets between roof framing members. Provide solid edge blocking between sheets.

B. Secure wall sheathing with long dimension (parallel) to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered.

C. Place building paper horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lap edges and ends.

D. Install telephone and electrical panel boards with plywood sheathing material where required. Over size the panel by 12 inches on all sides.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.

3.04 SCHEDULES

A. Above Grade Truss, Rafter, and Stud Framing: S/P/F species, 19 percent maximum moisture content, unless noted otherwise on drawings.

B. Sloped Roof Sheathing: 5/8 inch thick OSB or plywood, 24 x 48 inch sized sheets, square edges; appearance grade facing inward with proper span rating. Reference structural drawings for specific locations.

C. Blocking: S/P/F species, pressure preservative treatment.

D. Wall Sheathing: 5/8 inch thick OSB or plywood, 24 x 48 inch sized sheets, square edges; appearance grade facing inward with proper span rating. Reference structural drawings for specific locations.

E. Wall Siding: Hardiplank per drawings.

END OF SECTION 06112

06112-2 Framing and Sheathing

SECTION 06114

WOOD BLOCKING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Roof curbs and cants.

B. Blocking in wall and roof openings.

C. Wood furring and grounds.

D. Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets, and wood trim.

E. Telephone and electrical panel boards.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Miscellaneous Blocking: Minimum stud grade.

B. Plywood: APA Rated Sheathing, Grade C-D; Exposure Durability 1; sanded.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

2. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FRAMING

A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position.

B. Place horizontal members flat, crown side up.

C. Space framing and furring 16 inches o.c.

3.02 SHEATHING

A. Secure sheathing to framing members with ends over firm bearing and staggered.

B. Install telephone and electrical panel boards with plywood sheathing material where required. Over size the panel by 12 inches on all sides.

END OF SECTION 06114

06114-1 Wood Blocking

SECTION 06176

METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes wood roof trusses and truss accessories..

1.3

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing and subflooring and dimension lumber for supplementary framing and permanent bracing.

2. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for roof sheathing and subflooring and dimension lumber for supplementary framing and permanent bracing.

DEFINITIONS

1.4

A. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal-plate-connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to Project site.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.

2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.

3. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.

4. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.

5. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1.5

A. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated.

2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads: a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of span. b. Roof Trusses: Horizontal deflection at reactions of 1-1/4 inches.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For metal-plate connectors, metal framing anchors, bolts, and fasteners.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements, including bending strength, stiffness, and fastener-holding capacity. Include physical properties of treated materials, both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures when tested according to ASTM D 5664.

3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

06176-1 Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses

B. Shop Drawings: Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required; species, sizes, and stress grades of lumber; splice details; type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal connector plates; and bearing details.

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American

Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for

Project:

1. Preservative-treated wood.

2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.

3. Metal-plate connectors.

4. Metal framing anchors.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with TPI quality-control procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in TPI 1.

1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that involves inspection by SPIB, Timber Products Inspection, TPI, or other independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Source Limitations for Connector Plates: Obtain metal connector plates through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Source Limitations for Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire-retardant-treated wood product through one source from a single producer.

E. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications:

1. TP1 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction."

2. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate

Connected Wood Trusses."

3. TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal Plate

Connected Wood Trusses."

F. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AFPA's "National Design

Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement."

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with TPI recommendations to avoid damage and lateral bending. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective.

06176-2 Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying progress of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American

Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive natural or stained finish, omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, manufactured to actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified.

4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.

5. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.

B. Grade and Species: Provide dimension lumber of any species for truss chord and web members, graded visually or mechanically, and capable of supporting required loads without exceeding allowable design values according to AFPA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement."

1. Grade and Species: Provide visually graded dimension lumber for truss chord and web members.

2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the

American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.

2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED WOOD

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated wood is indicated, provide wood that complies with performance requirements in AWPA C20. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated wood after exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

3. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.

4. Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise indicated.

06176-3 Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses

B. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

2.5 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES

A. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1 from metal complying with requirements indicated below:

B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation; Designation SS,

Grade 33, and not less than 0.036 inch thick.

C. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, 80Z coating designation;

ASTM A 570/A 570M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, and not less than 0.047 inch thick.

D. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ50 coating designation;

Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, and not less than 0.036 inch thick.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this

Article for material and manufacture.

B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

.

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594,

Alloy Group 1 or 2.

2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and size indicated, and as follows:

1. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project.

2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type [304] [316].

1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

D. Truss Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-1/2 inches wide by

0.050 inch thick. Tie fastens to side of truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below.

06176-4 Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses

E. Truss Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening roof trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/4 inches wide by 0.062 inch thick. Tie fits over top of truss and fastens to both sides of truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below.

F. Roof Truss Clips: Angle clips for bracing bottom chord of roof trusses at non-load-bearing walls, 1-

1/4 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick. Clip is fastened to truss through slotted holes to allow for truss deflection.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of

94 percent zinc dust by weight.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints.

B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated.

C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1.

Position members to produce design camber indicated.

1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1.

D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.

B. Before installing, splice trusses delivered to Project site in more than one piece.

C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.

D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated.

E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction.

F. Space trusses as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening.

G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal framing anchors. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchor according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions.

H. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses.

1. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated.

I. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied.

Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.

1. Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-chord floor trusses at centers indicated.

J. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1.

K. Do not cut or remove truss members.

L. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements.

1. Do not alter trusses in field.

06176-5 Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses

3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to

ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Protective Coating: Clean and prepare exposed surfaces of metal connector plates. Brush apply primer, when part of coating system, and one coat of protective coating.

1. Apply materials to provide minimum dry film thickness recommended by coating system manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 06176

06176-6 Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses

SECTION 06200

FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Finish carpentry items, other than shop prefabricated casework.

B. Hardware and attachment accessories.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Custom.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of the General Requirements.

B. Protect work from moisture damage.

1.04 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings and as instructed by the manufacturer.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with plumbing and electrical rough-in, and installation of associated and adjacent components.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LUMBER MATERIALS

A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; Graded in accordance with AWI Custom; maximum moisture content of 6 percent; suitable for prime and paint.

B. Hardwood Lumber: Graded in accordance with AWI prime and paint.

2.02 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Exterior Plywood: Exposed to weather shall be group 1, Exterior type, Grade A-B or A-C as required for exposure.

B. Interior Plywood: Interior or Exterior type, Group 1 or 2, Grade B-D where concealed, Grade A-C one side exposed and Grade A-A two sides exposed.

C. Wood Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 Type 1; AWI standard, composed of wood chips, medium density, made with high waterproof resin binders; of grade to suit application; sanded faces.

2.03 FASTENERS

A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized finish in concealed locations and brass or chrome finish in exposed locations.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate to AWI Custom standards.

B. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.

C. Fit exposed sheet material edges with 3/8 inch matching hardwood edging. Use one piece for full length only.

D. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.

2.05 SHOP FINISHING

A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.

B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.

C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.

D. Seal, stain and varnish exposed to view surfaces. Brush apply only.

E. Prime paint. Seal surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.

06200-1 Finish Carpentry

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install work in accordance with AWI Custom Quality Standard.

B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.

C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.

D. Install components trim with nails, screws, bolts with blind fasteners or wall adhesive by gun application.

E. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT

A.

Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials, roofing and related metal flashings. Treat site-sawn cuts.

C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.

3.04 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING

A. Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09900.

B. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials.

3.05 SCHEDULE

A. Interior:

1. Trim: Primed and painted.

2. Loose Shelving: Melamine finished, color to be selected.

3. Window Sills: Primed and painted.

4. Wood Base: Primed and painted.

5. Wood Light Valance, primed and painted.

END OF SECTION 06200

06200-2 Finish Carpentry

SECTION 07181

WATER REPELLENT COATING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Water repellent coating applied to exterior and interior exposed brick and masonry units walls.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Applied coating to Repel moisture absorption in material being treated.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.

B. Protect coating liquid from freezing.

1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply coating when ambient temperature is lower than 50 degrees F or higher than 100 degrees

F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. HYDROZO - Clear Double 7.

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of the General Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Coating: Silane; containing 12 percent minimum solids.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify joint sealants are installed and cured.

B. Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean, and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter detrimental to application of coating.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Delay work until masonry mortar concrete substrate is cured a minimum of 5 days.

B. Remove loose particles and foreign matter.

C. Remove oil or foreign substance with a chemical solvent which will not affect coating.

D. Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and let dry.

3.03 APPLICATION

A.

Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Apply at a rate of 80 sq. ft. per gallon by airless spray.

C. Apply in one continuous, uniform coat.

END OF SECTION 07181

07181-1 Water Repellent Coating

SECTION 07212

BOARD INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Adhesive, sheet vapor and air barrier.

B. Board insulation foundation perimeter.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASTM D2842 - Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

B. ASTM C578 - Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.

C. ASTM E96 - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements.

B. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of vapor and air barrier at building enclosure elements.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations.

B.

Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special environmental conditions required for installation, installation techniques.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS - INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Dow Chemical Co. - Styrofoam

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of the General Requirements.

2.02 ADHESIVES

A. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Tape: Polyethylene polyester self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify site conditions.

B. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation boards are dry and ready to receive insulation.

C. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of honeycomb fin irregularities, materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond.

3.02 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect finished Work.

B. Do not permit Work to be damaged prior to covering insulation.

3.05 SCHEDULE

A. Perimeter Insulation - Slab on grade: Styrofoam brand insulation, 2 inch thick, (R-10.) 2’-0”min. vertical, reference drawings.

END OF SECTION 07212

07212-1 Board Insulation

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Batt insulation at exterior stud walls.

B. Batt insulation at attic space.

SECTION 07213

BATT INSULATION

C. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces, crevices in exterior wall and roof.

D. Sound batt insulation.

E. Vapor retarder.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and

Manufactured Housing.

B. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Materials of This Section: Provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure with thermal insulating materials in attic and walls.. Overlap insulations to ensure complete thermal envelope at all exterior surfaces.

1.04 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with all related Sections for installation of vapor retarder and other forms of insulation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS - INSULATION MATERIALS

A. OWENS-CORNING FIBERGLASS Product - thermal batt insulation.

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of the General Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Batt Insulation, Walls: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber batts; loose laid and taped, conforming to the following:

1. Thermal Resistance: Exterior Walls R-13, with added board insulation, reference drawings.

2. Other areas as indicated in the drawings - R-19, & R-11.

3. Batt Size: 5-1/2” & 3-1/2”.

4. Facing: Kraft or Foil as required to meet R values nand code requirements.

B. Blown Insulation, Attic: ASTM C739; Cellulose Fiber or Fiberglass type.

1. Therm. Res. R-38

2. Bulk for pneumatic placement

C. Sound Batt Insulation:

1. Batt size: 5-1/2” & 3-1/2”.

2. Facing: Unfaced.

D. Tape: Self-adhering type as recommended by the manufacturer, mesh reinforced, 2 inches wide.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify site conditions.

B. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to be installed.

07213-1 Batt Insulation

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.

C. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation.

D. Install with applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane, caulk or tape.

E. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane.

F. Place loose-fill insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown, either by pouring or by machine blowing to comply with ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively.

1. For cellulosic loose-fill insulation, comply with the Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers

Association's Special Report #3, "Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation."

END OF SECTION 07213

07213-2 Batt Insulation

SECTION 07311

ASPHALT SHINGLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Asphalt shingles.

2. Felt underlayment.

3. Self-adhering sheet underlayment.

4. Ridge vents.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and

Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of asphalt shingle, ridge and hip cap shingles, ridge vent and exposed valley lining indicated.

1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color selected.

1. Asphalt Shingle: Full-size asphalt shingle strip.

2. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Full-size ridge and hip cap asphalt shingle.

3. Ridge Vent: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Sample.

4. Exposed Valley Lining: 12 inches (300 mm) square.

5. Self-Adhering Underlayment: 12 inches (300 mm) square.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer, including certificate signed by asphalt shingle manufacturer stating that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed to install roofing system indicated.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for asphalt shingles.

F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For asphalt shingles.

G. Maintenance Data: For asphalt shingles to include in maintenance manuals.

H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual that is approved, authorized, or licensed by asphalt shingle roofing system manufacturer to install roofing system indicated.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles ridge vents, felt underlayment, and selfadhering sheet underlayment through one source from a single asphalt shingle manufacturer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide asphalt shingle and related roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

07311-1 Asphalt Shingles

1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class C; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes indicated.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight location according to asphalt shingle manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double-stack rolls.

1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members.

B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit asphalt shingle roofing to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: Roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by roofing Installer, covering Work of this Section, in which roofing Installer agrees to repair or replace components of asphalt shingle roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within the following warranty period:

1. Installation Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Product Warranty Period: Forty year product warranty.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Asphalt Shingles: 100 sq. ft (9.3 sq. m) of each type, in unbroken bundles.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

2.2 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES

A. Laminated-Strip Asphalt Shingles: Class A, ASTM D 3462, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing. GAF – Timberline

40 or approved equal, Minimum 30 year Material Warranty.

1. Butt Edge: Straight or Notched cut.

2. Strip Size: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Algae Resistance: Granules treated to resist algae discoloration.

4. Color and Blends As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles.

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felts: ASTM D 4869, TypeI, asphalt-saturated organic felts, nonperforated.

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Granular Surfaced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 55-mil- thick sheet; glass-fiber-mat-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt; mineral-granule surfaced; with release paper backing; cold applied

07311-2 Asphalt Shingles

2.4 RIDGE VENTS

A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard rigid section high-density polypropylene or other UVstabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven geotextile filter strips and with external deflector baffles; for use under ridge shingles.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.

B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) diameter, barbed shank, sharp-pointed, with a minimum

3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch (19 mm) into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) through OSB or plywood sheathing.

1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing.

C. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire with low profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch (25-mm) minimum diameter.

2.6 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal

Flashing and Trim."

1. Sheet Metal: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel or Prepainted, metallic-coated steel.

B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's

"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item.

1. Apron Flashings: Fabricate with lower flange a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over and 4 inches (100 mm) beyond each side of down slope asphalt shingles and 6 inches (150 mm)] up the vertical surface.

2. Step Flashings: Fabricate with a headlap of 2 inches (50 mm) and a minimum extension of 4 inches (100 mm)over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface.

3. Cricket Flashings: Fabricate with concealed flange extending a minimum of 18 inches (450 mm) beneath upslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches (150 mm) beyond each side of chimney, skylight and 6 inches (150 mm) above the roof plane.

4. Open Valley Flashings: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet (3 m) with 1-inch- (25-mm-) high inverted-V profile at center of valley and equal flange widths of 12 inches (300 mm).

5. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet (3 m) with 2-inch (50-mm) roof deck flange and 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) fascia flange with 3/8-inch (9.6-mm) drip at lower edge.

C. Vent Pipe Flashings: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, at least 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. Provide lead sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirt at slope of roof and extending at least 4 inches (100 mm) from pipe onto roof.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through asphalt shingles.

3. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

07311-3 Asphalt Shingles

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Double-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install double layers of felt underlayment on roof deck perpendicular to roof slope in parallel courses. Install a 19-inch- (485-mm-) wide starter course at eaves and completely cover with full-width second course. Install succeeding courses lapping previous courses 19 inches (485 mm) in shingle fashion. Lap ends a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Fasten with felt underlayment roofing nails.

1. Apply a continuous layer of asphalt roofing cement over starter course and on felt underlayment surface to be concealed by succeeding courses as each felt course is installed.

2. Install felt underlayment on roof sheathing not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment.

Lap edges over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches (75 mm) in direction to shed water.

3. Terminate felt underlayment extended up not less than 4 inches (100 mm)] against sidewalls, curbs, chimneys and other roof projections.

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated below, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm). Lap ends not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days.

1. Prime concrete and masonry surfaces to receive self-adhering sheet underlayment.

2. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 24 inches (600 mm) beyond interior face of exterior wall.

Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 24 inches (600 mm) beyond interior face of exterior wall.

Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches (450 mm) on each side. Hips: Extend

18 inches (450 mm on each side. Ridges: Extend 36 inches (914 mm) on each side without obstructing continuous ridge vent slot.

3. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 18 inches (450 mm) and return vertically against sidewall not less than 4 inches

(100 mm)

.

4. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend beyond penetrating element 18 inches (450 mm) and return vertically against penetrating element not less than 4 inches (100 mm).

5. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches (450 mm) on each roof slope.

C. Metal-Flashed Open Valley Underlayment: Install two layers of 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide felt underlayment centered in valley. Stagger end laps between layers at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Lap ends of each layer at least 12 inches (300 mm) in direction to shed water, and seal with asphalt roofing cement. Fasten each layer to roof deck with felt underlayment roofing nails.

1. Lap roof deck felt underlayment over first layer of valley felt underlayment at least 6 inches

(150 mm).

3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 7

Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing

Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and

Waterproofing Manual."

B. Apron Flashings: Extend lower flange over and beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and up the vertical surface.

C. Step Flashings: Install with a head lap of 2 inches (50 mm) and extend over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. Fasten to roof deck only.

D. Cricket or Backer Flashings: Install against the roof-penetrating element extending concealed flange beneath upslope asphalt shingles and beyond each side.

E. Open Valley Flashings: Install centrally in valleys, lapping ends at least 8 inches (200 mm) in direction to shed water. Fasten upper end of each length to roof deck beneath overlap.

07311-4 Asphalt Shingles

1. Secure hemmed flange edges into metal cleats spaced 12 inches apart and fastened to roof deck.

2. Adhere 9-inch- (225-mm-) wide strip of self-adhering sheet to metal flanges and to selfadhering sheet underlayment.

F. Rake Drip Edges: Install rake drip edge flashings over underlayment and fasten to roof deck.

G. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip edge flashings below underlayment and fasten to roof sheathing.

H. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe penetrations and asphalt shingles. Fasten and seal to asphalt shingles as recommended by manufacturer.

3.4 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION

A. Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's

"Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA

Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."

B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with tabs removed with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge.

1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch (13 mm) over fascia at eaves and rakes.

2. Install starter strip along rake edge.

C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure.

D. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure.

E. Install asphalt shingles by single-strip column or racking method, maintaining uniform exposure.

Install full length first course followed by cut second course, repeating alternating pattern in succeeding courses.

F. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of six roofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Where roof slope exceeds 20:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots.

2. Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots.

3. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F (10 deg C), seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots.

G. Open Valleys: Cut and fit asphalt shingles at open valleys, trimming upper concealed corners of shingle strips. Maintain uniform width of exposed open valley from highest to lowest point.

1. Set valley edge of asphalt shingles in a 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide bed of asphalt roofing cement.

2. Do not nail asphalt shingles to metal open valley flashings.

H. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.

I. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure.

Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.

END OF SECTION 07311

07311-5 Asphalt Shingles

SECTION 07460

SIDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Siding.

2. Soffits.

3. Trim & decorative accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For siding, soffit, and decorative accessories.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations for Siding and Soffit: Obtain [each type, color, texture, and pattern of] siding and soffit, including related accessories, through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Vinyl Siding Certification Program: Provide vinyl siding products that are listed in VSI's list of certified products.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with siding installation only if substrate is completely dry and if existing and forecasted weather conditions permit siding to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.7 SEQUENCING

A. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking, deforming, fading, or otherwise deteriorating beyond normal weathering.

1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish full lengths of siding and trim in a quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed.

07460-1 Siding

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each siding and soffit is based on the product named.

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

2.2 CEMENT SIDING

A. Fiber-Cement Siding: Submit manufacturer information for approval.

2.3 SOFFIT

1. Fiber-Cement Soffit: Submit manufacturer information for approval

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Siding Accessories: Provide starter strips, edge trim, corner cap, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration.

1. Provide accessories made from same material as adjacent siding, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide accessories matching color and texture of adjacent siding, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Decorative Accessories: Provide the following types of decorative accessories as indicated:

1. Corner posts with fluted faces.

2. Door and window casings.

3. Entrance and window head pediments.

4. Pilasters with fluted faces.

5. Shutters with louvered faces.

6. Louvers.

7. Lattice.

8. Fasciae.

9. Moldings and trim.

C. Flashing: Provide aluminum flashing complying with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and

Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated.

D. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: joint sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint

Sealants" for Use NT (nontraffic) and for Uses M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O joint substrates.

E. Fasteners:

1. For fastening to wood, use siding nails of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) into substrate.

2. For fastening to metal, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1/4 inch (6 mm) or 3 screw-threads into substrate.

3. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum fasteners. Where fasteners will be exposed to view, use prefinished aluminum fasteners in color to match item being fastened.

4. For fastening fiber-cement siding, use hot-dip galvanized fasteners.

07460-2 Siding

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of siding. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. Center nails in elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal movement. Overlap joints to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind.

B. Isolate dissimilar metals by separating with rubber gaskets or elastomeric sealant. Use rubber washers where fasteners made from dissimilar metal penetrate siding. Isolate dissimilar metals behind siding by covering with polyethylene film.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective siding materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements.

B. Clean finished surfaces according to siding manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction.

END OF SECTION 07460

07460-3 Siding

SECTION 07620

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Cap and sill flashings.

B. Gutters and down spouts.

C. Counterflashings at roof mounted equipment and vent stacks.

D. Fascias.

E. Miscellaneous flashings and closure pieces.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA standard details and requirements.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with three years documented experience.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of the General Requirements.

B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.

C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Pre-Coated Galvanized Steel: ASTM A446, Grade A, G90 zinc coating; 24 gage core steel, exposed flashings shall be shop prefinished with KYNAR coating of color as selected.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel with soft neoprene washers.

B. Underlayment: ASTM D2178, No. 30 asphalt saturated roofing felt.

C. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper.

D. Primer: Zinc chromate type.

E. Sealant: Polyurethane type, specified in Section 07900.

F. Bedding Compound: Rubber-asphalt type.

G. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type II.

H. Reglets: Recessed type, galvanized steel; face and ends covered with plastic tape.

I. Gutter and Downspout Anchorage Devices: SMACNA requirements. Type recommended by fabricator.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Gutters: Size and shape per drawings.

B. Downspouts: Rectangular profile.

C. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.

D. Downspout Boots: Flexible plastic or metal.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.

B. Fabricate cleats of metal, same material as sheet, interlockable with sheet.

C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.

07620-1 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

D. Form material with flat lock seams.

E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam and/or solder for rigidity, seal with sealant.

F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip.

G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing. Return and brake edges.

2.05 FINISH

A. Exposed metal shall pre-finished with Kynar finish color to be selected.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located.

B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.

B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Conform to drawing details included in the SMACNA manual unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

B. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with lead wedges. Pack remaining spaces with lead wool. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant.

C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.

D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.

E. Seal metal joints watertight. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using fasteners. Set splash pans under downspouts. Seal metal joints watertight.

END OF SECTION 07620

07620-2 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

SECTION 07900

JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Preparing substrate surfaces.

B. Sealant and joint backing.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions.

B. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum years documented experience.

1.04 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year warranty.

B. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight seal, water tight seal, and exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex (Interior Minor Movement): ASTM C920, Single component, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging; white color paintable; manufactured by Pecora AC 20 + silicone.

B. Butyl Sealant (Interior Minor Movement): ASTM C920 single component, solvent release, non-skinning, non-sagging, white, paintable; manufactured by Pecora BC 158.

C. Silicone Sealant (Exterior, Interior Major Movement and Water Resistant Areas): Single component, solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding; color as selected or to match adjacent materials; manufactured by Pecora 895 silicone.

D. Bituminous Based (Paving): Single component, asphalt compound, elongation capability of 0 to 2 percent of joint width.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

C. Joint Backing: ASTM D1056; round, closed or open cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.

D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.

B.

Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration.

07900-1 Joint Sealers

3.03 INSTALLATION

A.

Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required 2:1 width/depth ratios.

C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width.

D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

3.04 SCHEDULE

A. Interior: Caulk around all frames, windows, doors, openings, trim, etc., as required to seal or fill gaps, cracks, to make material transitions watertight and/or visually tight and finished.

B. Exterior: Caulk around all frames, windows, doors, openings, trim, material transitions etc., as required to seal or fill gaps, cracks, to make material transitions watertight and/or visually tight finished.

C. Paving: Caulk as required to seal or fill gaps, expansion joints, and cracks to make transitions watertight and/or visually tight.

END OF SECTION 07900

07900-2 Joint Sealers

SECTION 08111

STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Non-rated, fire rated and thermally insulated Masonite HD Wood Edge panel doors with steel facing and metal frames.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically

Handicapped People.

B. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.

C. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.

D. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site.

B.

Accept doors and frames on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage.

1.04 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DOOR MANUFACTURERS

A. Masonite Int. Corp

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of the General Requirements.

2.02 DOORS

A. Exterior Insulated Doors Non-thermally Broken: SDI-100 Grade III. Thermo-pane insulated windows where indicated.

B. Interior Doors (Non-rated and Fire Rated): SDI-100 Grade III.

2.03 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Face: Galvanized Steel facing, .0215” min. with protective chemical coatings and primer.

B. Core: Polyurethane or styrene foam.

C. Thermal Insulated Door. Total insulation R value of 7.7, measured in accordance with ASTM C236.

2.04 FRAMES

A. Exterior Frames: 16 gage thick material, base metal thickness.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Removable Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style screws.

B. Primer: Zinc chromate type.

C. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole.

2.06 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place.

B. Attach fire rated label to each door unit.

C. Close top and bottom edge of exterior doors with flush end closure. Seal joints watertight.

D. Configure exterior doors with special profile to receive recessed weatherstripping.

F. Fabricate frames as welded unit.

G. Transom Bars for Glazed Lights: Fixed type, of same profiles as jamb and head.

H. Prepare frame for silencers. Provide three single silencers for single doors and mullions of double doors on strike side. Provide two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions.

L. Configure exterior frames with special profile to receive recessed weathersripping.

M. Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with 4 or 2 inch head member.

08111-1 Standard Steel Doors and Frames

2.07 FINISH

A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized and chemically coated and primed.

B. Primer: Baked.

C. Coat inside of frame profile with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors and frames in accordance with ANSI/SDI-100 and DHI.

B. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.

C. Install door louvers, plumb and level.

D. Coordinate installation of doors and frames with installation of frames and hardware.

E. Coordinate with masonry and wallboard wall construction for anchor placement.

F. Install roll-formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor.

3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.

END OF SECTION 08111

08111-2 Standard Steel Doors and Frames

SECTION 08211

PANEL MASONITE DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Masonite Panel doors; Panel Masonite doors as indicated on the drawings; fire rated and non-rated.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site

B.

Accept doors on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation.

1.05 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty to the following term:

1. Interior Doors: 1 year

B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, telegraphing core construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Masonite Int Corp

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of the General Requirements.

2.02 DOOR TYPES

A. Panel Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick

2.03 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Core (Solid,Non-Rated).

B. Core (Solid, Fire Rated).

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Glazing Stops: Masonite, of same species as door facing Masonite with metal clips for rated doors, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style screws.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate non-rated doors in accordance with Standard requirements.

B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with Standards and to UL requirements. Attach fire rating label to door.

D. Provide lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer hardware reinforcement.

F. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.

G. Bond edge banding to cores.

H. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions.

Do not machine for surface hardware. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware.

I. Factory pre-fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings.

J. Cut and configure exterior door edge to receive recessed weather stripping devices.

08211-1 Panel Masonite Doors

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

B. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install fire rated and non-rated doors in accordance with Standards requirements.

B. Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges.

C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch (19 mm). Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements.

D. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. Use threaded through bolts for half surface hinges.

E. Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders.

F. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.

3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, corner to corner, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area.

B. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area.

C. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.

END OF SECTION 08211

08211-2 Panel Masonite Doors

SECTION 085313

VINYL WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fixed and operable vinyl-framed windows.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide vinyl windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of test size indicated below:

1. Size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS

2. Size indicated on Drawings.

B. Structural Performance: Provide vinyl windows capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass

AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test:

1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade, according to ASCE 7,

Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on

Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 85 mph (38 m/s) . b. Exposure Category: B.

C. Energy Star compliant

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to vinyl window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

1. Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vinyl windows, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating vinyl windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain vinyl windows through one source from a single manufacturer.

Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for vinyl windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify vinyl window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Coordinate with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace vinyl windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation.

085313-1 Vinyl Windows

c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass.

2. Warranty Period: a. Window: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Vinyl Finish: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A.

Manufacturer and Product: Marquee, General Aluminum, or approved equal Subject to compliance with requirements. Energy Star Rated

B. Marquee - Series 810 Marquee or Series 7000 GA, Single Hung, Tilt Sash and alternate Series for Fixed and or Picture windows.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Vinyl Extrusions: Rigid (unplasticized) hollow PVC extrusions, formulated and extruded for exterior applications, complying with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.

B. Vinyl Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match frame members.

C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with vinyl window members, cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate.

D. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.

E. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, or nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with

ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.

F. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and for complete concealment when vinyl window is closed.

1. Weather-Stripping Material: Elastomeric cellular preformed gaskets complying with ASTM C 509.

2. Weather-Stripping Material: Dense elastomeric gaskets complying with ASTM C 864.

3. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with

AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.

G. Sliding-type weather stripping is primarily for double-hung or horizontal-sliding windows. Delete first paragraph below if these types of units are not included or if full weather stripping is not desired.

H. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701/702.

1. Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semirigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material. Comply with AAMA 701/702.

I. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702.

2.3 WINDOWS

A. Window Type: Single hung & fixed As indicated on Drawings.

B. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide vinyl windows of performance indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.

C. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide vinyl windows tested for thermal performance according to

AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of [45] .

D.

Thermal Transmittance: Provide vinyl windows with a whole-window, U-factor maximum indicated at 15mph (24-km/h) exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to

[AAMA 1503]. U-Value - .34 Min., SHGC - .30 Min.

2.4 GLAZING

A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed vinyl window units.

B. Glass: Clear, insulating-glass units.

085313-2 Vinyl Windows

2.5 HARDWARE

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with vinyl; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock vinyl windows, and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals.

B. Sill Cap/Track: of thickness, dimensions, and profile indicated; designed to comply with performance requirements indicated and to drain to the exterior.

C. Locks and Latches: Designed to allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in direction indicated and operated from the inside only.

D. Roller Assemblies: Low-friction design.

2.6 INSECT SCREENS

A. Delete this Article if insect screens are not needed. Copy and revise Article if other types of screens, such as solar or protection screens, are required to suit Project. Revise first paragraph below if screens are located both inside and outside of window sashes or ventilators; differentiate here, on Drawings, or in a window schedule.

B. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation.

1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris.

2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints.

Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches (76 mm) of opening.

3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints.

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction.

C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.

D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.

B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.

In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

END OF SECTION 085313

085313-3 Vinyl Windows

SECTION 08710

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Hardware for wood, hollow steel, metal insulated and aluminum doors.

B. Thresholds.

C. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically

Handicapped People.

1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 3 years’ documented experience.

B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with 3 years’ documented experience approved by manufacturer.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.

B. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule.

C. Deliver keys to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year warranty.

1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.

B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 KEYING

A. Door Locks: Master keyed. Include construction keying, and key to existing keying system.

2.02 HNGES

A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1.

B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH).

2. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI).

3. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP).

4. Hager Companies (HAG).

5. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB).

6. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK).

7. PBB, Inc. (PBB).

8. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).

2.03 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL

A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural &

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility

Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." ANSI A117.1. FED-STD-

Accessibility Standards."

795, "Uniform Federal

08710-1 Door Hardware

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22 N).

B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

2.04 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply with the following:

1. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2.

2. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13.

3. Interconnected Locks: BHMA A156.12.

B. Bored Locks:

1. Manufacturers: a. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS). b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). d. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). e. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (YAL).

2.05 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A.

Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows:

1. Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key and a master key.

B. Keys: Nickel silver.

1. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. c. Grand Master Keys: Five. d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five.

2.06 CLOSERS

A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with [the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers

Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and

Facilities (ADAAG).", ANSI A117.1., FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards."

1. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require more than 30 lbf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open door to minimum required width.

C. Hold-Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate and interface integral smoke detector and closer device with fire alarm system.

D. Flush Floor Plates: Provide finish cover plates for floor closers unless thresholds are indicated. Match door hardware finish, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Recessed Floor Plates: Provide recessed floor plates with insert of floor finish material for floor closers unless thresholds are indicated. Provide extended closer spindle to accommodate thickness of floor finish.

F. Power-Assist Closers: As specified in Division 8 Section "Automatic Door Operators" for access doors for people with disabilities or where listed in the door hardware sets.

08710-2 Door Hardware

G. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.

H. Surface Closers: Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). b. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). c. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (NDC). d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). e. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (YAL).

I. Concealed Closers:

1. Manufacturers: a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). b. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (NDC). c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).

2.07 STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Stops and Bumpers:

1. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders.

B. Silencers for Wood Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum 5/8 by 3/4 inch (16 by 19 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.

C. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH).

2. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP).

3. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ).

4. Hager Companies (HAG).

5. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).

6. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).

7. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).

8. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).

9. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).

2.08 DOOR GASKETING

A. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.

B. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283.

C. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke-control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.

1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors.

D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.

08710-3 Door Hardware

E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

F. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.

G. Manufacturers:

1. Hager Companies (HAG).

2. National Guard Products (NGP).

3. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM).

4. Zero International (ZRO).

2.09 THRESHOLDS

A. Accessibility Requirements: Where thresholds are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with [the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with

Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG).", ANSI A117.1.,

FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards."

B. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Hager Companies (HAG).

2. National Guard Products (NGP).

3. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM).

4. Zero International (ZRO).

2.10 FABRICATION

A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard.

B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware.

Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.

2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications: a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. c. Closers to doors and frames.

3. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications unless door blocking is provided: a. Surface hinges to doors. b. Closers to doors and frames. c. Surface-mounted exit devices.

4. Spacers or Hex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.

5. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for

Wood Doors."

2.11 FINISHES

A. Standard: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

08710-4 Door Hardware

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics.

C. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

D. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.

C. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item:

1. Locksets:

40”

2. Push/Pulls:

45”

3. Dead Locks:

54”

4. Exit Devices:

42”

D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees.

2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt.

3. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.Requirements in paragraph below increase cost but are recommended as a good investment on substantial projects even though they may be difficult to monitor.

Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural

Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust, including adjusting operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.

END OF SECTION 08710

08710-5 Door Hardware

SECTION 08800

GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Glass and glazing for Sections referencing this Section for products and installation.

1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Glass and glazing materials of this Section shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier:

1.

2.

To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air and vapor seal.

Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.

B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with UBC 91 code.

C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less.

1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.

B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds.

1.04 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to adjacent

Work.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year manufacturer’s warranty.

B. Warranty: Include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, reflective coating on mirrors, delamination of laminated glass and replacement of same.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS

A. Float Glass (Type FG): Clear, 1/4 inch thick minimum.

B. Safety Glass (Type SG): Clear; fully tempered with horizontal tempering 1/4 inch thick minimum at all locations where glass is less than 18 inches above finished floor.

C. Tinted Glass (Type TG): Float type, heat strengthened, light reducing, color (to be selected); 1/4 inch thick minimum.

D. Mirror Glass (Type MG): Clear with copper and silver coating, organic overcoating, beveled edges, 1/4 inch thick minimum, sizes as indicated.

2.02 SEALED INSULATING GLASS MATERIALS

A. Insulated Glass Units (Type IG): ASTM E774 and E773; double pane with edge seal; outer pane of 1/4 inch glass tinted at exterior, inner pane of 1/4 inch glass.

2.03 GLAZING COMPOUNDS

A. Exterior windows not shop installed shall be glazed with vinyl or neoprene gaskets, extruded elastic polybutene tape sealant, a combination of polysulphide base compound and elastic glazing compound, or a combination of extruded polysulphide tape, polysulphide base compound elastic glazing compound.

B. Doors and interior stopped -in glass shall be glazed using putty or elastic glazing compound and stop beads.

08800-1 Glazing

C. Exterior glazing of steel sash shall be DAP Metal Glaze. Interior glazing of steel sash shall be DAP

Steel Sash Putty.

2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or Silicone, 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.

B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene or Silicone, 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face.

C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 - 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper.

D.

Glazing Clips: Manufacturer’s standard type.

E. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Mirror adhesive, chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.

B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.

B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.

C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.

D. Install glazing in accordance with Flat Jobbers Association Glazing Manual.

3.03 INSTALLATION - MIRRORS

A.

Set mirrors with adhesive, applied in accordance with adhesive manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Place plumb and level.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. Remove labels after work is complete. Clean glass and mirrors.

3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A.

After installation, mark pane with an “X” by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.

END OF SECTION 08800

08800-2 Glazing

SECTION 09260

GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Acoustical insulation.

B. Gypsum board.

D. Taped and sanded joint treatment.

E. Texture finish.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard.

B. ASTM C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction.

C. ASTM C630 - Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM

A. United States Gypsum.

B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

C. Substitutions: Under provisions of the General Requirements.

2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Studs and Tracks: Wood 2x4 and 2x6 framing. Refer to Section 06112 unless noted otherwise.

B. Furring, Framing and Accessories: ASTM C645. Galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage thick, unless noted otherwise.

C. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.

D. Adhesive: ASTM C557.

2.03 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS

A. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges.

B. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: (At all wet areas) ASTM C630; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced, 3-1/2 inch thick.

B. Corner Beads: Metal.

C. Edge Trim: GA 201 and GA 216; Type L bead.

D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water.

E. Fasteners: ASTM C1002, Type S12, W, and GA-216.

F. Resilient channel: USG, RC-1 or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

3.02 WOOD STUD INSTALLATION

A Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center, unless noted otherwise.

B. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions, extend stud framing through the ceiling to the structure above, unless noted otherwise. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners.

C Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs.

D. Blocking: Nail wood blocking to studs or Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, and hardware.

09260-1 Gypsum Board Systems

3.03 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION

A. Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete walls.

B. Erect furring channels vertically; space maximum 16 inches on center, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines, abutting walls.

C. Install thermal insulation between furring channels directly attached to concrete masonry walls in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.04 FURRING FOR FIRE RATINGS

A. Install furring as required for fire resistance ratings indicated.

3.05 CEILING FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate location of hangers with other work.

B. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work.

C. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each end of openings.

D. Laterally brace entire suspension system.

3.06 ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

A. Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Locate joints over framing members.

B. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.

3.07 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Install gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Erect single layer standard gypsum board vertical, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing.

C. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing.

D. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing.

E. Place second layer perpendicular to first layer. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer.

F. Erect exterior gypsum soffit board perpendicular to supports, with staggered end joints over supports.

G. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit board with sealant.

H. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as directed.

I. Place corner beads at external corners as indicated. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials as indicated.

J. Caulk at sound walls.

3.08 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes.

B. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32.

C. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile.

D. Tape joints and corners of cementitious backing board.

3.09 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.

END OF SECTION 09260

09260-2 Gypsum Board Systems

SECTION 09306

FLOOR AND WALL TILE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Ceramic tile floor finish using the thinset application method.

B. Ceramic tile wall finish using the thinset application method.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements.

B. Product Data: Provide instructions for using adhesives and grouts.

C. Samples: Submit two samples illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout color.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.

B.

Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment.

B. Maintain 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TILE MANUFACTURERS

A. FLOOR: Ceramic Tile – Products 6x 6, 6x12, 12x12, as selected by owner.

B. WALL: Ceramic Tile – Products 4x4, 6x 6, as selected by owner.

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of the General Requirements as equal or better.

2.02 CERAMIC TILE MATERIALS

A. Ceramic Floor Tile: ANSI A137.1, conforming to the following:

1. Moisture Absorption 0.5 to 3.0 percent

2. Size

3. Shape

4. Edge

5. Surface Finish

6. Color

7. Pattern

6x6, 6x12, 12x12 inch square/rectangular square/bullnose matte glazed slip resistant as selected uncoursed

B. Glazed Wall Tile: Flat tile as follows:

1. Module Size: 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches, 6 by 4-1/4 inches, 6 by 6 inches, as selected.

2. Thickness: 5/16 inch.

3. Finish: Bright, opaque, Bright, clear, Mat, opaque, Mat, clear, Crystalline glaze. As Selected

2.03 BASE MATERIALS

A. Base: Match floor tile for moisture absorption, surface finish, and color:

1. Length 12 inch

2.

3.

4.

5.

Height

Top Edge

Internal Corner

External Corner

4 inch bull nosed coved bullnosed

2.04 ADHESIVE MATERIALS

A. Adhesives: thinset bond type as recommended and/or manufactured by the tile manufacturer.

2.05 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Mortar Materials: Portland cement, sand, latex additive, and water as recommended and/or manufactured by the tile manufacturer, color to be selected.

09306-1 Floor and Wall Tile

2.06 GROUT MIX

A. Mix and proportion pre-mix grout materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration.

B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.

C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances.

D. Apply sealer conditioner to substrate surfaces in accordance with adhesive manufacturer’s instructions.

3.03 INSTALLATION - THINSET METHOD

A.

Install adhesive tile, thresholds, and grout in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and/or the

TCA Handbook.

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.

C. Place edge strips at exposed tile edges.

D. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor, base and wall joints.

E. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.

F. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.

G. Keep expansion, control joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.

H. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.

I. Grout tile joints.

J. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.

K. Install shower pan per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.

3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.

END OF SECTION 09306

09306-2 Floor and Wall Tile

SECTION 09650

RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Vinyl sheet Flooring and Vinyl Plank Flooring

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of the General Requirements.

B. Protect roll materials from damage.

1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability.

B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials.

1.05 MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.

1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide 60 sq ft of flooring, 10 lineal feet of base, and stair materials of each material specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS – VINYL OR SHEET FLOORING

A. Vinyl Composition Tile; ASTM F-1066, Tarkett Favoritt sheet flooring.

1. Total Thickness: .010”

2. Size; 6’-0”

3. Color to be selected.

4. Manufacturer: a) Tarkett, Armstrong b) Or as approved equal.

5. Color & pattern to be selected.

2.02 MATERIALS – VINYL PLANK FLOORING

A. Plank Flooringase: FS SS-W-40. Rubber; coved; premolded external corners:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Size: 6” x 36”

Thickness: .080”

Length: 36”sections.

Manufacturers: a) b)

Tarkett, Armstrong

Or as approved equal.

5. Color & pattern to be selected.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.

B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

C. Edge Strips: Flooring material as approved.

D. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent, and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting.

B. Verify floor and lower wall surfaces are free of substances that may impair adhesion of new adhesive and finish materials.

09650-1 Resilient Flooring

09650-2 Resilient Flooring

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.

B. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

C. Vacuum clean substrate.

D. Apply primer as recommended by manufacturer.

3.05 INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORING

A.

Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.

C. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.

D. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern.

G. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar.

H. Install resilient edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates.

G. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean all work as described in the General Requirements.

B. Remove access adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.

C. Clean, seal, and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.07 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect finished Work.

B. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION 09650

09650-3 Resilient Flooring

SECTION 09680

CARPET – PAD AND TACK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Cut Pile carpet with Pad or Integral backing

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type of substrate:

1. Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.

2. Carpet Cushion: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics and durability.

B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each

Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on

Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample.

2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples.

3. Carpet Cushion: 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Sample.

4. Carpet Seam: 6-inch (150-mm) Sample.

5. Mitered Carpet Border Seam: 12-inch (300-mm-) square Sample. Show carpet pattern alignment.

C. Product Schedule: For carpet and carpet cushion. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

F. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet and carpet

cushion.

G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation

Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Mockups: Before installing carpet, build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."

09680-1 Carpet – Pad and Tack

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12,

"Ventilation."

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet and carpet cushion until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

C. Do not install carpet and carpet cushion over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.

2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.

3. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty for Carpet Cushion: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet cushion installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty includes consequent removal and replacement of carpet and accessories.

2. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.

3. Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression.

4. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.

(8.3 sq. m) .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CUT PILE CARPET

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. To be selected by owner/developer

C. Pile Characteristic: Cut pile.

D. Pile Thickness: 0.16 inch for finished carpet.

E. Face Weight: 25 oz./Sq. Yd.

F. Total Weight: 40 oz./Sq. Yd. for finished carpet.

G. Primary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material.

H. Secondary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material.

I. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material

J. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.

2.2 CARPET CUSHION

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Thickness: 3/8 inch. Min.

2. Density: 6 lbs/cu. ft. Min.

09680-2 Carpet – Pad and Tack

2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet cushion manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer carpet and carpet cushion manufacturers.

1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when tested according to ASTM D 5116: a. Total VOCs: 10.00 mg/sq. m x h. b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h. c. 2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq. m x h.

C. Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood, in strips as required to match cushion thickness and that comply with CRI 104, Section 12.2.

D. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.

E. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet cushion manufacturer.

2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place

Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet.

3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.

C. For wood subfloors, verify the following:

1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 6 Section "Rough

Carpentry."

2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions

1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) , unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet cushion manufacturer.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's carpet and carpet cushion manufacturers' written installation instructions for the following:

1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down

Installation."

09680-3 Carpet – Pad and Tack

2. Double-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 10, "Double Glue-Down

Installation."

3. Carpet with Attached-Cushion Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11, "Attached-

Cushion Installations."

4. Stretch-in Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Stretch-in Installation."

5. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, "Carpet on Stairs" for stretch-in gluedown installation.

B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.

C. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.

D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.

E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned Carpet

Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations.

H. Comply with carpet cushion manufacturer's written recommendations. Install carpet cushion seams at

90-degree angle with carpet seams.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.

3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet cushion manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 09680

09680-4 Carpet – Pad and Tack

SECTION 09900

PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Surface preparation and field application of paints and coatings.

1.02 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.

B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

C.

Container label to include manufacturer’s name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer’s instructions.

1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Provide lighting level of 80 foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer - Paint, Transparent Finishes, Stain, Primer Sealers, and Block Filler by SHERWIN-

WILLIAMS or as approved equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating; good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.

C. Patching Materials: Latex filler.

D. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler.

E. All interior paints and primers shall comply with Green Seal standards for low VOC limits.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Refer to schedule at end of section for surface finish schedule.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application.

C. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

09900-1 Painting

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

B. Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove existing coatings that exhibit loose surface defects.

C. Seal with shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.

D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

E. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning.

F. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply compatible sealer or primer.

G. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.

H. Concrete Floors: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acidalkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry.

I. Copper Surfaces Scheduled for a Paint Finish: Remove contamination by steam, high pressure water, or solvent washing. Apply vinyl etch primer immediately following cleaning.

J. Copper Surfaces Scheduled for a Natural Oxidized Finish: Remove contamination by applying oxidizing solution of copper acetate and ammonium chloride in acetic acid. Rub on repeatedly for required effect. Once attained, rinse surfaces with clear water and allow to dry.

K. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.

L. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.

M. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of trisodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.

N. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.

O. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand, power tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs.

P. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.

Q. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats.

R. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats.

S. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after prime coat has been applied.

T. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after sealer has been applied.

U. Glue-Laminated Beams: Prior to finishing, wash surfaces with solvent, remove grease and dirt.

V. Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.

3.03 APPLICATION

A.

Apply products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.

C. Apply each coat to uniform finish.

D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.

E. Sand wood and metal lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

F. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat.

G. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.

09900-2 Painting

H. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface.

I. Prime concealed surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.

J. Prime concealed surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.

3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately.

B. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports except where items are prefinished.

C. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to visible surfaces. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.

D. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas.

E. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment.

F. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site.

3.06 SCHEDULE

The following are for exterior and interior surfaces, and are all products of Sherwin-Williams.

EXTERIOR SURFACES

1. WOOD (Excluding Plywood)

A. Satin Finish/Latex Base

1st Coat: Exterior Oil Based Wood Primer

2nd Coat: Duration, Satin

3rd Coat: Duration, Satin

2. PLYWOOD

A. Painted (Satin Finish/Latex Base)

1st Coat:

2nd Coat:

3rd Coat:

Exterior Oil Based Wood Primer

Duration, Satin

Duration, Satin

3. FERROUS METAL (Handrails)

A. Painted (Gloss Finish/Alkyd Base)

1st Coat: Kem Kromik Primer, B50N2/B50W1

2nd Coat: Industrial Enamel, B54 Series

3rd Coat: Industrial Enamel, B54 Series

B. Finish on these items shall be applied to achieve polished or car finish.

4. GALVANIZED METAL

A. Painted (Satin Finish/Latex Base)

1st Coat: Duration, Satin

2nd Coat: Duration, Satin

5. ALUMINUM

A. Painted (Satin Finish/Latex Base)

1st Coat: Duration, Satin

2nd Coat: Duration, Satin

6. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Painted (Satin Finish/Latex Base)

1st Coat:

2nd Coat: Duration, Satin

3rd Coat:

Loxon Primer/Sealer

Duration, Satin

09900-3 Painting

7. CONCRETE, STUCCO, BRICK

A. Painted (Satin Finish/Latex Base)

1st Coat: Loxon Primer/Sealer

2nd Coat: Duration, Satin

3rd Coat: Duration, Satin

8. TRAFFIC AND PARKING LINE MARKING

A. Painted (ProMar Traffic Marking Paint)

1st Coat: B29W1-WHITE, or B29Y2-YELLOW

INTERIOR SURFACES

1. WOOD AND PLYWOOD

A. Painted (Eg-Shel Finish/Alkyd Base)

B.

1st Coat: ProMar 200 Latex Primer, B49W2

2nd Coat: ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel, B20W200

3rd Coat: ProMar 200 Eg-Shel, B20W200

Stained and Varnished (Clear Finish) Opened Grained Wood

1st Coat:

4th Coat:

Interior Wood Stain, A48

2nd Coat: Sherwood 100 Fast Dri Semi-Paste Filler D70T1

3rd Coat: Oil Base Gloss Varnish, A66V91

Oil Base Gloss Varnish, A66V91 or Oil Base Satin Varnish, A66F90

2. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Painted (Eg-Shel Finish/Latex Base)

1st Coat: ProMar Block Filler, B25W1

2nd Coat: ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel, B20W200

3rd Coat: ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel, B20W200

3. CONCRETE, MASONRY EPOXY SYSTEM (SOLVENT BASE)

A. Painted (Gloss Finish)

1st Coat: Tile-Clad II Epoxy, B62W100 Series

2nd Coat: Tile-Clad II Epoxy, B62W100 Series

(9 mils wet, 4 mils dry per coat)

4. GYPSUM WALLBOARD

A. Painted (Eg-Shel Finish/Latex Base)

1st Coat: ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer, B28W200

2nd Coat: ProMar 200 Alkyd Eg-Shel Enamel, B33W200

3rd Coat: ProMar 200 Alkyd Eg-Shel Enamel, B33W200

5. FERROUS METAL (Gloss, Handrails)

A. Painted (Gloss Finish/Alkyd Base)

1st Coat: Kem Kromik Metal Primer, B50N2/B50W1

2nd Coat: Industrial Enamel, B54 Series

3rd Coat: Industrial Enamel, B54 Series

6. GALVANIZED METAL

A. Painted (Flat Finish/Latex Base)

1st Coat: ProMar 200 Latex Flat Wall Paint, B30W200

2nd Coat: ProMar 200 Latex Flat Wall Paint, B30W200

7. ALUMINUM

A. Painted (Flat Finish/Latex Base)

1st Coat: ProMar 200 Latex Flat Wall Paint, B30W200

2nd Coat: ProMar 200 Latex Flat Wall Paint, B30W200

8. CONCRETE FLOORS (SEALED)

A. Painted (Clear Acrylic Floor Finish)

1st Coat: Concrete and Terrazzo Sealer B44V22 or W.R. Meadows – TIAH

END OF SECTION 09900

09900-4 Painting

SECTION 10800

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Toilet and washroom accessories.

B. Grab bars, Towel bars

C. Mirrors

D. Toilet Paper, Paper Towel

E. Attachment hardware

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. BOBRICK WASHROOM EQUIPMENT INC., or BRADLEY CORPORATION.

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of the General Requirements.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Weld and grind joints of fabricated components, smooth.

B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without distortion.

Maintain surfaces without scratches or dents.

C. Fabricate grab bars of tubing, free of visible joints, return to wall with end attachment flanges. Form bar with

1 1/2 inches clear of wall surface. Knurl grip surfaces.

D. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.

E. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 to 1.25 oz./sq. yd. Galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices.

B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, satin finish.

C. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish.

D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings and instructed by the manufacturer.

B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. Coordinate with ADA requirements.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A.

Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and Americans with Disabilities Act. Also reference ANSI A117.1.

B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.

3.04 SCHEDULE

A. Reference drawings for all required accessories and submit for approval including but not limited to:

B. Toilet Tissue Holders: Bobrick.

C. Towel Disp/Waste Recep. : Bobrick

D.

Towel Bar: (2 per bathroom) 24” with concealed wall bracket.

E. Grab Bars as indicated on the drawings, Bobrick.

F. Medicine Cabinet: Bobrick B-398, One piece construction, gloss white, adjustable glass shelves.

G. Shower Curtain Rod: Stainless Steel Tube, 1 inch O.D., concealed attachment.

END OF SECTION 10800

10800-1 Toilet and Bath Accessories

SECTION 11451

RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Cooking equipment including: Electric ranges, Microwave ovens, Energy Star Compliant.

2. Ventilation range hoods, Energy Star Compliant.

3. Refrigerator/freezers, Energy Star Compliant.

4. Cleaning appliances: Dishwashers, Clothes washers, Clothes dryers, Energy Star Compliant.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include operating characteristics, dimensions of individual appliances, and finishes for each appliance. All appliances must be submitted and

approved by the Owner/Developer prior to ordering.

B. Samples for Verification: factory-applied color finishes.

C. Appliance Schedule: For appliances; use same designations indicated on Drawings.

D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that products comply with requirements.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each product.

F. Maintenance Data: For each product to include in maintenance manuals.

G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer with a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.

B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for product's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following product certifications:

1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

2. UL and NEMA: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards.

3. ANSI: Provide gas-burning appliances that comply with ANSI Z21 Series standards.

4. NAECA: Provide residential appliances that comply with NAECA standards.

D. Regulatory Requirements, Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance

Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities

(ADAAG)." ANSI A117.1. FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards."

1. Operable Parts: Provide controls with forward reach no higher than 48 inches (1219 mm) above the floor, horizontal front reach no more than 25 inches (635 mm), horizontal side reach no more than 24 inches (610 mm), and that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).

2. Range or Cooktop: Provide knee clearance for forward approach of 27 inches (685 mm) high, 30 inches (760 mm) wide, and 11 inches (280 mm) horizontally; toe space clearance of 9 inches (230 mm) high and 17 inches (430 mm) horizontally; with insulated underside of cooktop to prevent burns, shocks, or abrasions. Provide top surface 34 inches (865 mm) above the floor, with controls that do not require reaching across burners.

3. Refrigerator/Freezer: Provide 50 percent of freezer space within 54 inches (1370 mm) of the floor.

11451-1 Residential Appliances

E. AHAM Standards: Provide appliances that comply with the following AHAM standards:

1. Dishwashers: AHAM DW-DW1.

2. Electric Ranges: AHAM ER-1.

3. Clothes Dryers: AHAM HLD-1.

4. Household Refrigerators: AHAM HRF-1.

5. Household Freezers: AHAM HRF-1.

6. Trash Compactors: AHAM TC-1.

F. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost analysis

(estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the FTC Appliance

Labeling Rule.

1. Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of each appliance specified agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Electric Range: Five-year limited warranty for surface-burner elements.

2. Microwave Oven: Five-year limited warranty fordefects in the magnetron tube.

3. Refrigerator/Freezer: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on the sealed refrigeration system.

4. Freezer: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on the sealed refrigeration system.

5. Dishwasher: 5-year warranty for in-home service against deterioration of tub and door liner.

6. Clothes Washer: 5-year limited warranty for the inner wash basket and outer tub, and five-year limited warranty for the balance suspension system and drive transmission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

3. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each residential appliance is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

4.

All appliances & finishes must be submitted and approved by the Owner/Developer prior to

ordering.

2.2 COOKING APPLIANCES, provide one at each unit and clubhouse as indicated.

A. Range (ADA Units, front controls), Black

1. Products: GE, 30” Free Standing with Front Controls Similar to RG below

2. Acceptable manufacturers, submit equals for approval. a. Amana Appliances, General Electric Company; Hotpoint; KitchenAid, Maytag

B. Range RG), Black

1. Products: GE, 30” Free Standing Range. Model # JBP23DRBB

2. Acceptable manufacturers, submit equals for approval. a. Amana Appliances, General Electric Company; Hotpoint; KitchenAid, Maytag

C. Microwave Oven Over Range, MO), Black

1. Products: Over Range Microwave Oven GE, 1.5 cf, 950 watt, Model # JNM1541DMBB

2. Acceptable manufacturers, submit equals for approval. a. Amana Appliances; General Electric Company; Hotpoint; KitchenAid; Maytag;

11451-2 Residential Appliances

D. Microwave Oven Counter Top, MO), Black

1. Products: Over Range Microwave Oven GE, .7 cf, 700 watt, Model # JES0738DPBB

2. Acceptable manufacturers, submit equals for approval. a. Amana Appliances; General Electric Company; Hotpoint; KitchenAid; Maytag;

E. Exhaust Hood EX), Black

1.

Products: Broan 30” Model # 413001

2. Acceptable manufacturers, submit equals for approval. a. General Electric Company; Hotpoint; KitchenAid; Maytag; Whirlpool Corp

2.3 REFRIGERATION APPLIANCES, provide one at each unit and clubhouse as indicated.

A. Refrigerator/Freezer w ice maker, RF), Black

1. Products: GE Top-Freezer Refrigerator, 18 Cu.Ft., Model # GTH18GCDBB

2. Acceptable manufacturers, submit equals for approval. a. Amana Appliances; General Electric Company; Hotpoint; KitchenAid; Maytag;

2.4 CLEANING APPLIANCES, provide one at each unit and clubhouse as indicated.

A. Dishwasher DW), Black

1. Products: GE, Model # GSD330DBB ADA Units, or GLDT690DBB at others

2. Acceptable manufacturers, submit equals for approval. a. Amana Appliances; General Electric Company; Hotpoint; KitchenAid; Maytag;

B. Clothes Washer CW, provide one at each unit and clubhouse as indicated.

1.

Products: GE, Model # GCWN4950DWS, White

2. Acceptable manufacturers, submit equals for approval. a. Amana Appliances; General Electric Company; Hotpoint; KitchenAid; Maytag;

C. Clothes Dryer CD, provide one at each unit and clubhouse as indicated.

1. Products: GE, Model # GTDX400EDWS, stacking kit where indicated, White

2. Acceptable manufacturers, submit equals for approval. a. Amana Appliances; General Electric Company; Hotpoint; KitchenAid; Maytag;

D. Clothes Washer (ADA Units, Frontload) , provide one at each unit and clubhouse as indicated.

1. Products: GE, Model # WCVH4800KWW, White

2. Acceptable manufacturers, submit equals for approval. a. Amana Appliances; General Electric Company; Hotpoint; KitchenAid; Maytag;

E. Clothes Dryer (ADA Units, Frontload) , provide one at each unit and clubhouse as indicated.

1. Products: GE, Model # DCVH480EKWW, White

2. Acceptable manufacturers, submit equals for approval. a. Amana Appliances; General Electric Company; Hotpoint; KitchenAid; Maytag;

2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Color-Coated Finish: Provide appliances with manufacturer's standard finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, color, gloss, and minimum dry film thickness for painted finishes

D. For exact finish, insert names of coating manufacturers and products.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

11451-3 Residential Appliances

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed.

C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area.

Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.

D. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments.

B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed.

C. Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain residential appliances. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION 11451

11451-4 Residential Appliances

SECTION 12356

KITCHEN CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.2

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Wood-faced kitchen cabinets.

2. Plastic-laminate-faced kitchen cabinets.

3. Wood- and plastic-laminate-faced kitchen cabinets.

4. Vinyl-faced kitchen cabinets.

5. Wood-faced vanity cabinets.

6. Plastic-laminate-faced vanity cabinets.

7. Wood- and plastic-laminate-faced vanity cabinets.

8. Vinyl-faced vanity cabinets.

9. Plastic-laminate countertops.

10. Solid-surfacing-material countertops.

1.3

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 11 Section "Residential Appliances" for appliances mounted in kitchen casework.

2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for sink units mounted in countertops.

DEFINIITIONS

A. Exposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors.

B. Semiexposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers. Bottoms of wall cabinets are defined as

"semiexposed."

1.4

C. Concealed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and utility cabinets are defined as "concealed."

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For the following:

Samples and Submittals must be approved by Owner/Developer prior to ordering or production.

1. Cabinets.

2. Plastic-laminate countertops.

3. Solid-surfacing material.

4. Cabinet hardware.

B. Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and backsplash profiles, cutouts for plumbing fixtures, and methods of joining countertops.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material exposed to view.

12356-1 Kitchen Casework

D. Samples for Verification: For the following materials; in sets showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected:

1. Wood-veneered panels with transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) , for each species.

2. Solid wood with transparent finish, 50 sq. in.

(300 sq. cm) , for each species.

3. Plastic laminate for casework finish, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) .

4. Plastic laminate for countertops, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) .

5. Solid-surfacing material for countertops, 6 inches (150 mm) square.

6. One unit of each type of exposed hardware.

E. Samples for Verification: As follows:

1. One full-size, finished base cabinet complete with hardware, doors, and drawers, but without countertop.

2. One full-size, finished wall cabinet complete with hardware, doors, and adjustable shelves.

3. Plastic laminate for countertops, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) .

4. Solid-surfacing material for countertops, 6 inches (150 mm) square.

F.

Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of casework certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. Samples and Submittals must be approved by Owner/Developer prior to

ordering or production.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations for Cabinets: Obtain cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Designations: Drawings indicate size, configurations, and finish material of casework by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' casework of similar sizes, similar door and drawer configurations, same finish material, and complying with the

Specifications may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."

C. Quality Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards:

1. Cabinets: KCMA A161.1. a. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the above standard.

2. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: KCMA A161.2.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install kitchen casework until building is enclosed, wetwork is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Established Dimensions: Where kitchen casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting.

C. Field Measurements: Where kitchen casework is indicated to fit to existing construction, verify dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes if necessary.

D. Field Measurements for Countertops: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of kitchen casework.

12356-2 Kitchen Casework

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cabinets:

2. Plastic Laminate for Countertops: a. Formica Corp. b. Laminart. c. Nevamar Corp. d. Pioneer Plastics Corp. e. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div. f. Wilson: Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.

3. Solid-Surfacing Material for Countertops: a. Avonite, Inc. b. DuPont Polymers. c. Formica Corp. d. Nevamar Corp. e. Swan Corporation (The). f. Wilson: Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.

C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cabinets that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Breckenridge; American Woodmark Corp.

2. Rockingham; Merillat Industries, Inc.

E. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Cherryvale" by Shrock Cabinet Co.

2.2 COLORS, TEXTURES, AND PATTERNS

A. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Match Architect's samples.

B. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As indicated by referencing manufacturer's designations.

C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for these characteristics.

2.3 CABINET MATERIALS

A. Exposed Materials: Comply with the following:

1. Exposed Wood Species: As follows. Do not use two adjacent exposed faces that are noticeably dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or natural character markings. a. Red oak. b. White oak. c. Select white birch. d. Select red birch. e. Natural birch. f. Select white ash. g. Hard maple. h. Cherry.

12356-3 Kitchen Casework

2. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects, selected for compatible grain and color, and kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content.

3. Plywood: Hardwood plywood complying with HPVA HP-1 with face veneer of species indicated, selected for compatible color and grain with Grade A faces and Grade C backs of same species as faces. a. Edge band exposed edges with minimum 1/8-inch (3-mm-) thick, solid-wood edging of same species as face veneer.

4. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3,

Grade VGS. a. Where edges of solid-color plastic-laminate sheets will be visible after fabrication, provide through-color plastic laminate.

5. PVC Edge Molding: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 3 mm thick at doors and drawer fronts, and 1 mm thick elsewhere.

6. Vinyl-Faced Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard complying with ANSI A208.2, milled to required shapes, with a thermoformed vinyl overlay applied in a vacuum or membrane press.

B. Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Solid Wood: Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects and kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content. Stained to be compatible with exposed surfaces.

2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood complying with HPVA HP-1 with Grade C faces stained to be compatible with exposed surfaces and Grade 3 backs of same species as faces.

3. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3,

Grade VGS.

4. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade CLS.

5. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Medium-density particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1,

Grade M-2; with surface of thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. a. Provide thermoset decorative overlay on both sides of shelves, dividers, drawer bodies, and other components with two semiexposed surfaces. b. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with semiexposed edges.

6. Vinyl-Faced Particleboard: Medium-density particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1,

Grade M-2 with an embossed, wood-grain-patterned vinyl film adhesively bonded to particleboard. c. Provide vinyl film on both sides of shelves, dividers, drawer bodies, and other components with two semiexposed surfaces and on semiexposed edges.

C. Concealed Materials: Comply with the following:

1. Solid Wood or Plywood: Any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility. Hardwood and softwood lumber kiln dried to 7 and 10 percent moisture content, respectively.

2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.

3. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2.

4. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered.

2.4 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.

1. Grade: HGS.

2. Grade: HGP.

3. Provide through-color plastic laminate.

4. Grade for Backer Sheet: BKL.

B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.

C. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.

D. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with material and performance requirements of ANSI Z124.3, Type 5 or Type 6, without a precoated finish.

12356-4 Kitchen Casework

E. Solid Wood Edges and Trim: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects, selected for compatible grain and color, and kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content.

1. Wood Species: Red oak.

2. Wood Species: White oak.

3. Wood Species: Hard maple.

4. Wood Species: Cherry.

2.5 CASEWORK HARDWARE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, material, size, and finish as selected from manufacturer's standard choices.

B. Hinges: Decorative full-surface hinges.

C. Hinges: Concealed butt hinges.

D. Hinges: Semiconcealed (wraparound) butt hinges for overlay doors.

E. Hinges: Pivot (knife) hinges.

F. Hinges: Concealed European-style hinges.

F. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying with BHMA A156.9,

Type B05091.

2.6 CABINET CONSTRUCTION

A. Face Style: Flush overlay; door and drawer faces cover cabinet body members or face frames with only enough space between faces for operating clearance.

B. Face Style: Reveal overlay; door and drawer faces partially cover cabinet body or face frames.

C. Face Style: Lipped overlay; door and drawer faces are rabbeted and partially inset within cabinet body or face frame with the lip of the rabbet overlapping cabinet body members or face frames.

D. Face Style: Flush inset; door and drawer faces are set within cabinet body or face frame flush with cabinet face.

E. Face Frames: Frameless.

F. Face Frames: 3/4-by-1-5/8-inch (19-by-41-mm) solid wood.

G. Face Frames: 3/4-by-1-5/8-inch (19-by-41-mm) solid wood with glued mortise and tenon or doweled joints.

H. Face Frames: 5/8-inch (16-mm-) thick particleboard with plastic laminate on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.

I. Face Frames: 1/2-inch (12.7-mm-) thick, vinyl-faced fiberboard with vinyl overlay on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.

J. Door and Drawer Fronts: 1/2-inch (12.7-mm-) thick, veneer-faced plywood.

K. Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid-wood stiles and rails, 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick, with 3/4-inch (19-mm) thick, solid-wood center panels.

L. Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid-wood stiles and rails, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick, with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) thick, veneer-faced plywood center panels.

12356-5 Kitchen Casework

M Door and Drawer Fronts: 1/2-inch (12.7-mm-) thick particleboard with plastic-laminate faces, backs, and edges. Provide same grade, pattern, color, and texture of plastic laminate for backs and edges as for faces.

N. Door and Drawer Fronts: 1/2-inch (12.7-mm-) thick particleboard with plastic-laminate faces and backs, and PVC edge banding. Provide same grade, pattern, color, and texture of plastic laminate for backs as for faces.

O. Door and Drawer Fronts: 1/2-inch (12.7-mm-) thick particleboard with plastic-laminate faces, backs, and edges, except provide continuous solid-wood pulls on one edge. Provide same grade, pattern, color, and texture of plastic laminate for backs and edges as for faces.

P. Door and Drawer Fronts: 1/2-inch (12.7-mm-) thick, vinyl-faced fiberboard with vinyl overlay on faces, backs, and edges.

Q. Exposed Cabinet Ends: Veneer-faced plywood.

R. Exposed Cabinet Ends: Plastic-laminate-faced particleboard.

S. Exposed Cabinet Ends: Vinyl-faced fiberboard.

T. Cabinet Ends: 5/8-inch (16-mm-) thick particleboard or 1/2-inch (12.7-mm-) thick plywood.

U. Cabinet Ends: 1/2-inch (12.7-mm-) thick particleboard or 3/8-inch (9.5-mm-) thick plywood.

V. Cabinet Tops and Bottoms: 5/8-inch (16-mm-) thick particleboard or 1/2-inch (12.7-mm-) thick plywood, fully supported by and secured in rabbets in end panels, front frame, and back rail.

W. Cabinet Tops and Bottoms: 1/2-inch (12.7-mm-) thick particleboard or 3/8-inch (9.5-mm-) thick plywood, fully supported by and secured in rabbets in end panels, front frame, and back rail.

X. Back, Top, and Bottom Rails: 3/4-by-2-1/2-inch (19-by-63-mm) solid wood, interlocking with end panels and rabbeted to receive top and bottom panels. Back rails secured under pressure with glue and with mechanical fasteners.

Y. Wall-Hung Unit Back Panels: 3/16-inch (4.8-mm-) thick plywood fastened to rear edge of end panels and to top and bottom rails.

Z. Base Unit Back Panels: 3/16-inch (4.8-mm-) thick plywood fastened to rear edge of end panels and to top and bottom rails.

AA. Base Unit Back Panels: 1/8-inch (3.2-mm-) thick hardboard fastened to rear edge of end panels and to top and bottom rails.

BB. Front Frame Drawer Rails: 3/4-by-1-1/4-inch (19-by-32-mm) solid wood mortised and fastened into face frame.

CC. Drawers: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.

1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or with glued dovetail joints.

2. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued dovetail joints.

3. Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: 3/4-inch (19-mm-) thick solid wood.

4. Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: 1/2-inch (12.7-mm-) thick solid wood.

5. Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: 1/2-inch (12.7-mm-) thick solid wood or 3/8-inch (9.5-mm-) thick plywood.

6. Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: 3/8-inch (9.5-mm-) thick particleboard.

7. Bottoms: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm-) thick plywood.

8. Bottoms: 3/16-inch (4.8-mm-) thick plywood.

9. Bottoms: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm-) thick hardboard.

10. Bottoms: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm-) thick particleboard.

12356-6 Kitchen Casework

DD. Shelves: 3/4-inch (19-mm-) thick particleboard or 5/8-inch (16-mm-) thick plywood.

EE. Shelves: 5/8-inch (16-mm-) thick particleboard or 1/2-inch (12.7-mm-) thick plywood.

FF. Joinery: Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed mechanical fasteners. Connect tops and bottoms of wall cabinets and bottoms and stretchers of base cabinets to ends and dividers with mechanical fasteners. Rabbet tops, bottoms, and backs into end panels.

GG. Factory Finishing: To greatest extent possible, finish casework at factory. Defer only final touchup until after installation.

2.7 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front, cove (intersection of top with backsplash), backsplash, and end-splash style:

1. Front: No drip (raised marine edge with rolled front).

2. Front: Rolled.

3. Front: Bevel.

4. Front: Self-edge.

5. Front: Wood-trimmed edge as indicated.

6. Cove: Cove molding (one-piece postformed laminate supported at junction of top and backsplash by wood cove molding).

7. Cove: Applied (backsplash rests on top forming seam at inside corner).

8. Backsplash: Curved or waterfall shape with scribe.

9. Backsplash: Square edge without scribe.

10. Backsplash: Sloped top edge without scribe.

11. Backsplash: Square edge with scribe.

12. End Splash: None.

13. End Splash: Square edge without scribe.

14. End Splash: Sloped top edge without scribe.

15. End Splash: Square edge with scribe.

B. Plastic-Laminate Substrate: Particleboard not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.

1. For countertops at sinks and lavatories, use phenolic-resin particleboard or exterior-grade plywood.

2. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) at front, back, and ends with additional layers of particleboard laminated to top.

C. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet on underside of countertop substrate.

D. Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate.

2.8 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS

A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:

1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top.

2. Front: Bevel.

3. Front: 3/4-inch (19-mm) bullnose.

4. Front: Radius edge with apron, 2 inches (50 mm) high with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) radius.

5. Front: 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laminated bullnose.

6. Front: Wood-trimmed edge as indicated.

7. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.

8. Backsplash: Bevel.

9. Backsplash: Radius edge with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) radius.

B. Construction: 1/2-inch (12.7-mm-) thick, solid-surfacing-material countertops and backsplashes.

C. Construction: 3/4-inch (19-mm-) thick, solid-surfacing-material countertops and backsplashes.

D. Construction: 3/4-inch (19-mm-) thick, solid-surfacing-material countertops and backsplashes with front edge of countertops built up with same material.

12356-7 Kitchen Casework

E. Construction: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm-) thick, solid-surfacing material laminated to 3/4-inch (19-mm-) thick particleboard for countertops with wood-trimmed edges and 3/4-inch (19-mm-) thick, solidsurfacing-material backsplashes.

F. Construction: 3/4-inch (19-mm-) thick, solid-surfacing-material countertops and backsplashes with wood-trimmed edges.

G. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install casework with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework face.

B. Install casework without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are aligned. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.

C. Install casework and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m) .

D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing.

1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., with toggle bolts through metal backing behind gypsum board.

E. Fasten plastic-laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Form seams using splines to align adjacent surfaces, and secure with glue and concealed clamping devices designed for this purpose.

F. Fasten solid-surfacing-material countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Align adjacent surfaces, and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Clean casework on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

END OF SECTION 12356

12356-8 Kitchen Casework

SECTION 12491

HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1.2

A. This Section includes the following types of venetian blinds and accessories:

1. Miniblinds with aluminum louver slats.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of horizontal louver blinds. Include elevations, sections, details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings, attachments to other Work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of horizontal louver blind indicated.

1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.

D. Window Treatment Schedule: Include horizontal louver blinds in schedule using same room designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of horizontal louver blind product, signed by product manufacturer.

1.3

F. Product Test Reports: For each type of horizontal louver blind product.

G. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining horizontal louver blinds and finishes.

2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance.

3. Operating hardware.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Corded Window Covering Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with

WCMA A 100.1.

E. Year 2000 Compliant: Computer hardware and software shall be capable of accurately processing, providing, and receiving date data from, into, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, including leap year calculations.

12491-1 Horizontal Louver Blinds

F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.

1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect.

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2.2

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Horizontal Louver Blinds, Aluminum Louver Slats: a. Comfortex Window Fashions. b. Hunter Douglas Window Fashions. c. Levolor Contract; a Newell Company; Levolor. d. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; Bali. e. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; Graber. f. Verosol USA, Inc.

HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM LOUVER SLATS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Louver Slats: Aluminum, alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with crowned profile and radiused corners.

1. Verify availability of louver widths with manufacturers. Retain one of four nominal slat widths below.

2. Nominal Slat Width: 1 inch (25 mm) for miniblinds.

3. Nominal Slat Thickness: Not less than 0.006 inch (0.15 mm).

4. Slat Finish: Two colors as indicated, one per side of slat.

C. Headrail/Valance: Decorative, integrated headrail/valance not requiring a separate valance or end brackets for finished appearance; formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating mechanisms.

D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube, sealed with plastic or metal capped ends with enclosed and protected ladders and tapes to prevent their contact with sill.

12491-2 Horizontal Louver Blinds

E. Tilt Control: Consisting of enclosed worm gear mechanism and linkage rod, for the following operation:

F. Lift Operation: Manual, cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or descending travel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

3.2

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND INSTALLATION

A. Install blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so exterior louver edges in any position are not closer than 1 inch to interior face of glass. Install intermediate support as required to prevent deflection in headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's operation hardware, if any.

B. Flush Mounted: Install blinds with louver edges flush with finish face of opening if slats are tilted open.

C. Jamb Mounted: Install headrail flush with face of opening jamb and head.

D. Head Mounted: Install headrail on face of opening head.

E. Recessed: Install headrail concealed within blind pocket.

F. Connections: Connect motorized operators to building electrical system.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial

Completion.

C. Replace damaged blinds that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of

Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 12491

12491-3 Horizontal Louver Blinds

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement